Products and specifications discussed herein are subject to change by Micron without notice.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Features
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D1.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 1©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
DDR2 SDRAM
MT47H256M4 – 32 Meg x 4 x 8 banks
MT47H128M8 – 16 Meg x 8 x 8 banks
MT47H64M16 – 8 Meg x 16 x 8 banks
Features
•RoHS compliant
•V
DD = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V
JEDEC-standard 1.8V I/O (SSTL_18-compatible)
Differential data strobe (DQS, DQS#) option
•4n-bit prefetch architecture
Duplicate output strobe (RDQS) option for x8
DLL to align DQ and DQS transitions with CK
8 internal banks for concurrent operation
Programmable CAS latency (CL)
Posted CAS additive latency (AL)
WRITE latency = READ latency - 1 tCK
Selectable burst lengths (BL): 4 or 8
Adjustable data-output drive strength
64ms, 8,192-cycle refresh
On-die termination (ODT)
Industrial temperature (IT) option
Supports JEDEC clock jitter specification
Notes: 1. Not recommended for new designs.
Options Marking
Configuration
256 Meg x 4 (32 Meg x 4 x 8 banks) 256M4
128 Meg x 8 (16 Meg x 8 x 8 banks) 128M8
64 Meg x 16 (8 Meg x 16 x 8 banks) 64M16
FBGA package (Pb-free)
92-ball FBGA (11mm x 19mm) Rev. A BT
84-ball FBGA (8mm x 12.5mm) Rev. E, G
HR
60-ball FBGA (8mm x 11.5mm) Rev. E, G
HQ
FBGA package (lead solder)
84-ball FBGA (8mm x 12.5mm) Rev. E, G
HW
60-ball FBGA (8mm x 11.5mm) Rev. E, G
HV
Timing – cycle time
1.875ns @ CL = 7 (DDR2-1066) -187E
2.5ns @ CL = 5 (DDR2-800) -25E
2.5ns @ CL = 6 (DDR2-800) -25
3.0ns @ CL = 4 (DDR2-667) -3E
3.0ns @ CL = 5 (DDR2-667) -3
3.75ns @ CL = 4 (DDR2-533) -37E1
5.0ns @ CL = 3 (DDR2-400) -5E1
Self refresh
Standard None
Low-power L
Operating temperature
Commercial (0°C TC 85°C) None
Industrial (–40°C TC 95°C;
–40°C TA 85°C)
IT
Revision :A1/:E/:G
Table 1: Key Timing Parameters
Speed Grade
Data Rate (MT/s)
tRC (ns)CL = 3 CL = 4 CL = 5 CL = 6 CL = 7
-187E n/a n/a 667 800 1066 54
-25E n/a 533 800 800 n/a 55
-25 n/a 533 667 800 n/a 55
-3E n/a 667 667 n/a n/a 54
-3 400 533 667 n/a n/a 55
-37E 400 533 n/a n/a n/a 55
-5E 400 400 n/a n/a n/a 55
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D1.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 2©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Features
Figure 1: 1Gb DDR2 Part Numbers
Notes: 1. Not all speeds and configurations are available in all packages.
FBGA Part Number System
Due to space limitations, FBGA-packaged components have an abbreviated part
marking that is different from the part number. For a quick conversion of an FBGA code,
see the FBGA Part Marking Decoder on Microns Web site: www.micron.com.
Table 2: Addressing
Parameter 256 Meg x 4 128 Meg x 8 64 Meg x 16
Configuration 32 Meg x 4 x 8 banks 16 Meg x 8 x 8 banks 8 Meg x 16 x 8 banks
Refresh count 8K 8K 8K
Row address A0–A13 (16K) A0–A13 (16K) A0–A12 (8K)
Bank address BA0–BA2 (8) BA0–BA2 (8) BA0–BA2 (8)
Column address A0–A9, A11 (2K) A0–A9 (1K) A0–A9 (1K)
Package
Pb-free
92-ball 11mm x 19mm FBGA
84-ball 8mm x 12.5mm FBGA
60-ball 8mm x 11.5mm FBGA
Lead solder
84-ball 8mm x 12.5mm FBGA
60-ball 8mm x 11.5mm FBGA
BT
HR
HQ
HW
HV
Example Part Number: MT47H128M8BT-37E
Configuration
256 Meg x 4
128 Meg x 8
64 Meg x 16
256M4
128M8
64M16
Speed Grade
tCK = 1.875ns, CL = 7
tCK = 2.5ns, CL = 5
tCK = 2.5ns, CL = 6
tCK = 3ns, CL = 4
tCK = 3ns, CL = 5
tCK = 3.75ns, CL = 4
tCK = 5ns, CL = 3
-187E
-25E
-25
-3E
-3
-37E
-5E
-
Configuration
MT47H Package Speed
Revision
Revision
:A/:E/:G
:
Low power
Industrial temperature
L
IT
{
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16TOC.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 3©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
FBGA Part Number System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
State Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Industrial Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Automotive Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Functional Block Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Ball Assignments and Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Package Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Electrical Specifications – Absolute Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Temperature and Thermal Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Electrical Specifications – IDD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
IDD Specifications and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
IDD7 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AC Timing Operating Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
AC and DC Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
ODT DC Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Input Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Output Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Output Driver Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Power and Ground Clamp Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Input Slew Rate Derating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Truth Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
DESELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
NO OPERATION (NOP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
LOAD MODE (LM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
ACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
PRECHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
REFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
SELF REFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Mode Register (MR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Extended Mode Register (EMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Extended Mode Register 2 (EMR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Extended Mode Register 3 (EMR 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
ACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
PRECHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
REFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
SELF REFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power-Down Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Precharge Power-Down Clock Frequency Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ODT Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
MRS Command to ODT Update Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core1.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 4©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
State Diagram
State Diagram
Figure 2: Simplified State Diagram
Notes: 1. This diagram provides the basic command flow. It is not comprehensive and does not iden-
tify all timing requirements or possible command restrictions such as multibank interaction,
power down, entry/exit, etc.
Automatic Sequence
Command Sequence
PRE
Initialization
sequence
Self
refreshing
CKE L
Refreshing
Precharge
power-
down
Setting
MRS
EMRS
SR
CKE H
REFRESH
Idle
all banks
precharged
CKE L
CKE L
CKE L
(E)MRS
OCD
default
Activating
ACT
Bank
active
Reading
READ
Writing
WRITE
Active
power-
down
CKE L
CKE L
CKE H
CKE L
Writing
with
auto
precharge
Reading
with
auto
precharge
READ AP
WRITE AP
PRE, PRE A
WRITE AP
READ AP
READ
WRITE
Precharging
CKE H
WRITE READ
PRE, PRE A
ACT = ACTIVATE
CKE H = CKE HIGH, exit power-down or self refresh
CKE L = CKE LOW, enter power-down
(E)MRS = (Extended) mode register set
PRE = PRECHARGE
PRE A = PRECHARGE ALL
READ = READ
READ AP = READ with auto precharge
REFRESH = REFRESH
SR = SELF REFRESH
WRITE = WRITE
WRITE AP = WRITE with auto precharge
WRITE AP
READ AP
PRE, PRE A
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core1.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 5©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Functional Description
Functional Description
The DDR2 SDRAM uses a double data rate architecture to achieve high-speed operation.
The double data rate architecture is essentially a 4n-prefetch architecture, with an inter-
face designed to transfer two data words per clock cycle at the I/O balls. A single read or
write access for the DDR2 SDRAM effectively consists of a single 4n-bit-wide, one-clock-
cycle data transfer at the internal DRAM core and four corresponding n-bit-wide, one-
half-clock-cycle data transfers at the I/O balls.
A bidirectional data strobe (DQS, DQS#) is transmitted externally, along with data, for
use in data capture at the receiver. DQS is a strobe transmitted by the DDR2 SDRAM
during READs and by the memory controller during WRITEs. DQS is edge-aligned with
data for READs and center-aligned with data for WRITEs. The x16 offering has two data
strobes, one for the lower byte (LDQS, LDQS#) and one for the upper byte (UDQS,
UDQS#).
The DDR2 SDRAM operates from a differential clock (CK and CK#); the crossing of CK
going HIGH and CK# going LOW will be referred to as the positive edge of CK.
Commands (address and control signals) are registered at every positive edge of CK.
Input data is registered on both edges of DQS, and output data is referenced to both
edges of DQS as well as to both edges of CK.
Read and write accesses to the DDR2 SDRAM are burst-oriented; accesses start at a
selected location and continue for a programmed number of locations in a programmed
sequence. Accesses begin with the registration of an ACTIVATE command, which is then
followed by a READ or WRITE command. The address bits registered coincident with the
ACTIVATE command are used to select the bank and row to be accessed. The address
bits registered coincident with the READ or WRITE command are used to select the bank
and the starting column location for the burst access.
The DDR2 SDRAM provides for programmable READ or WRITE burst lengths of four or
eight locations. DDR2 SDRAM supports interrupting a burst READ of eight with another
READ or a burst WRITE of eight with another WRITE. An AUTO PRECHARGE function
may be enabled to provide a self-timed row precharge that is initiated at the end of the
burst access.
As with standard DDR SDRAMs, the pipelined, multibank architecture of DDR2 SDRAMs
allows for concurrent operation, thereby providing high, effective bandwidth by hiding
row precharge and activation time.
A self refresh mode is provided, along with a power-saving, power-down mode.
All inputs are compatible with the JEDEC standard for SSTL_18. All full drive-strength
outputs are SSTL_18-compatible.
Industrial Temperature
The industrial temperature (IT) option, if offered, has two simultaneous requirements:
ambient temperature surrounding the device cannot be less than –40°C or greater than
+85°C, and the case temperature cannot be less than –40°C or greater than +95°C. JEDEC
specifications require the refresh rate to double when TC exceeds +85°C; this also
requires use of the high-temperature self refresh option. Additionally, ODT resistance
and the input/output impedance must be derated when TC is < 0°C or > +85°C.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core1.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 6©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Functional Description
Automotive Temperature
The automotive temperature (AT) option, if offered, has two simultaneous require-
ments: ambient temperature surrounding the device cannot be less than –40°C or
greater than +105°C, and the case temperature cannot be less than –40°C or greater than
+105°C. JEDEC specifications require the refresh rate to double when TC exceeds +85°C;
this also requires use of the high-temperature self refresh option. Additionally, ODT
resistance and the input/output impedance must be derated when TC is < 0°C or >
+85°C.
General Notes
The functionality and the timing specifications discussed in this data sheet are for the
DLL-enabled mode of operation.
Throughout the data sheet, the various figures and text refer to DQs as “DQ.” The DQ
term is to be interpreted as any and all DQ collectively, unless specifically stated
otherwise. Additionally, the x16 is divided into 2 bytes: the lower byte and the upper
byte. For the lower byte (DQ0–DQ7), DM refers to LDM and DQS refers to LDQS. For
the upper byte (DQ8–DQ15), DM refers to UDM and DQS refers to UDQS.
Complete functionality is described throughout the document, and any page or
diagram may have been simplified to convey a topic and may not be inclusive of all
requirements.
Any specific requirement takes precedence over a general statement.
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 7©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Functional Block Diagrams
Functional Block Diagrams
The DDR2 SDRAM is a high-speed CMOS, dynamic random access memory. It is inter-
nally configured as a multi-bank DRAM.
Figure 3: 256 Meg x 4 Functional Block Diagram
BANK 5
BANK 6
BANK 7
BANK 4
BANK 7
BANK 4
BANK 5
BANK 6
ROW-
ADDRESS
MUX
CONTROL
LOGIC
COLUMN-
ADDRESS
COUNTER/
LATCH
MODE
REGISTERS
11
A0-A14,
BA0-BA2
15
ADDRESS
REGISTER
18
512
(x16)
8,192
COLUMN
DECODER
BANK 0
MEMORY
ARRAY
(32,768 x 512 x 16)
BANK 0
ROW-
ADDRESS
LATCH
&
DECODER
32,768
SENSE AMPLIFIERS
BANK
CONTROL
LOGIC
18
BANK 1
BANK 2
BANK 3
15
9
3
2
REFRESH
COUNTER
4
44
2
RCVRS
16
16
16
CK OUT
DATA
DQS, DQS#
CK,CK#
CK,CK#
COL0,COL1
COL0,COL1
CK IN
DRVRS
DLL
MUX
DQS
GENERATOR
4
4
4
4
4
2
READ
LATCH
WRITE
FIFO
&
DRIVERS
DATA
4
4
4
4
16
1
1
1
1
MASK
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
2
BANK 1
BANK 2
BANK 3
INPUT
REGISTERS
DM
DQ0–DQ3
RAS#
CAS#
CK
CS#
WE#
CK#
COMMAND
DECODE
CKE
ODT
I/O GATING
DM MASK LOGICDQS, DQS#
V
DD
Q
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
VssQ
sw1 sw2
ODT CONTROL
sw3
R3
R3
sw3
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
R3
R3
sw3
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
R3
R3
sw3
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 8©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Functional Block Diagrams
Figure 4: 128 Meg x 8 Functional Block Diagram
Figure 5: 64 Meg x 16 Functional Block Diagram
BANK 5
BANK 6
BANK 7
BANK 4
BANK 7
BANK 4
BANK 5
BANK 6
ROW-
ADDRESS
MUX
CONTROL
LOGIC
COLUMN-
ADDRESS
COUNTER/
LATCH
MODE
REGISTERS
10
A0-A14,
BA0-BA2
15
ADDRESS
REGISTER
18
256
(x32)
8,192
COLUMN
DECODER
BANK 0
MEMORY
ARRAY
(32,768 x 256 x 32)
BANK 0
ROW-
ADDRESS
LATCH
&
DECODER
32,768
SENSE AMPLIFIERS
BANK
CONTROL
LOGIC
18
BANK 1
BANK 2
BANK 3
15
8
3
2
REFRESH
COUNTER
8
88
2
32
32
32
CK OUT
DATA
UDQS, UDQS#
LDQS, LDQS#
CK,CK#
CK,CK#
COL0,COL1
COL0,COL1
CK IN
DRVRS
DLL
MUX
DQS
GENERATOR
8
8
8
8
8
2
READ
LATCH
WRITE
FIFO
&
DRIVERS
DATA
8
8
8
8
32
2
2
2
2
MASK
2
2
2
2
2
4
8
8
2
BANK 1
BANK 2
BANK 3
INPUT
REGISTERS
DM
DQ0–DQ7
RAS#
CAS#
CK
CS#
WE#
CK#
COMMAND
DECODE
CKE
ODT
I/O GATING
DM MASK LOGICDQS, DQS#
RDQS#
RDQS
V
DD
Q
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
VssQ
sw1 sw2
ODT CONTROL
sw3
R3
R3
sw3
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
R3
R3
sw3
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
R3
R3
sw3
RCVRS
BANK 5
BANK 6
BANK 7
BANK 4
BANK 7
BANK 4
BANK 5
BANK 6
14
ROW-
ADDRESS
MUX
CONTROL
LOGIC
COLUMN-
ADDRESS
COUNTER/
LATCH
MODE
REGISTERS
10
A0–A13,
BA0–BA2
14
ADDRESS
REGISTER 256
(x64)
16,384
COLUMN
DECODER
BANK 0
MEMORY
ARRAY
(16,324 x 256 x 64)
BANK 0
ROW-
ADDRESS
LATCH
&
DECODER
16,324
SENSE AMPLIFIERS
BANK
CONTROL
LOGIC
18
BANK 1
BANK 2
BANK 3
13
8
3
2
REFRESH
COUNTER
16
1616
4
RCVRS
64
64
64
CK OUT
DATA
UDQS, UDQS#
LDQS, LDQS#
CK,CK#
CK,CK#
COL0,COL1
COL0,COL1
CK IN
DRVRS
DLL
MUX
DQS
GENERATOR
16
16
16
16
16
UDQS, UDQS#
LDQS, LDQS#
4
READ
LATCH
WRITE
FIFO
&
DRIVERS
DATA
16
16
16
16
64
2
2
2
2
MASK
2
2
2
2
2
8
16
16
2
BANK 1
BANK 2
BANK 3
INPUT
REGISTERS
UDM, LDM
DQ0–DQ15
V
DD
Q
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
VssQ
sw1 sw2
ODT CONTROL
RAS#
CAS#
CK
CS#
WE#
CK#
COMMAND
DECODE
CKE
ODT
I/O GATING
DM MASK LOGIC
18
sw3
R3
R3
sw3
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
R3
R3
sw3
R1
R1
R2
R2
sw1 sw2
R3
R3
sw3
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 9©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Figure 6: 60-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 Ball Assignments (Top View)
465
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
9
V
DD
Q
NF,DQ7
V
DD
Q
NF,DQ5
V
DD
ODT
V
DD
V
SS
1
V
DD
NF,DQ6
V
DD
Q
NF,DQ4
V
DD
L
BA2
V
SS
V
DD
2
NC, RDQS#/NU
V
SS
Q
DQ1
V
SS
Q
V
REF
CKE
BA0
A10
A3
A7
A12
7
V
SS
Q
DQS
V
DD
Q
DQ2
V
SS
DL
RAS#
CAS#
A2
A6
A11
RFU
8
DQS#/NU
V
SS
Q
DQ0
V
SS
Q
CK
CK#
CS#
A0
A4
A8
A13
3
V
SS
DM, DM/RDQS
V
DD
Q
DQ3
V
SS
WE#
BA1
A1
A5
A9
RFU
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 10 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Figure 7: 84-Ball FBGA – x16 Ball Assignments (Top View)
VDDQ
DQ15
VDDQ
DQ13
VDDQ
DQ7
VDDQ
DQ5
VDD
ODT
VDD
VSS
UDQS#/NU
VSSQ
DQ8
VSSQ
LDQS#/NU
VSSQ
DQ0
VSSQ
CK
CK#
CS#
A0
A4
A8
RFU
VSSQ
UDQS
VDDQ
DQ10
VSSQ
LDQS
VDDQ
DQ2
VSSDL
RAS#
CAS#
A2
A6
A11
RFU
VSS
UDM
VDDQ
DQ11
VSS
LDM
VDDQ
DQ3
VSS
WE#
BA1
A1
A5
A9
RFU
NC
VSSQ
DQ9
VSSQ
NC
VSSQ
DQ1
VSSQ
VREF
CKE
BA0
A10
A3
A7
A12
VDD
DQ14
VDDQ
DQ12
VDD
DQ6
VDDQ
DQ4
VDDL
BA2
VSS
VDD
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
1234 67895
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 11 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Figure 8: 92-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 Ball Assignments (Top View)
234 678951
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NF, RDQS#/NU
V
SS
Q
DQ1
V
SS
Q
V
REF
CKE
BA0
A10
A3
A7
A12
NC
NC
V
DD
NC
NC
NC
V
DD
NF,DQ6
V
DD
Q
NF,DQ4
V
DD
L
BA2
V
SS
V
DD
NC
V
SS
NC
NC
NC
V
SS
DM/RDQS
V
DD
Q
DQ3
V
SS
WE#
BA1
A1
A5
A9
RFU
V
SS
Q
NC
NC
NC
V
SS
Q
DQS
V
DD
Q
DQ2
V
SS
DL
RAS#
CAS#
A2
A6
A11
RFU
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
DQS#/NU
V
SS
Q
DQ0
V
SS
Q
CK
CK#
CS#
A0
A4
A8
A13
NC
NC
V
DD
Q
NC
NC
NC
V
DD
Q
NF,DQ7
V
DD
Q
NF,DQ5
V
DD
ODT
V
DD
V
SS
NC
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
T
U
V
W
Y
AA
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 12 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Figure 9: 92-Ball FBGA – x16 Ball Assignments (Top View)
234 678951
NC
NC
V
SS
Q
DQ9
V
SS
Q
NC
V
SS
Q
DQ1
V
SS
Q
V
REF
CKE
BA0
A10
A3
A7
A12
NC
NC
V
DD
DQ14
V
DD
Q
DQ12
V
DD
DQ6
V
DD
Q
DQ4
V
DD
L
BA2
V
SS
V
DD
NC
V
SS
UDM
V
DD
Q
DQ11
V
SS
LDM
V
DD
Q
DQ3
V
SS
WE#
BA1
A1
A5
A9
RFU
V
SS
Q
UDQS
V
DD
Q
DQ10
V
SS
Q
LDQS
V
DD
Q
DQ2
V
SS
DL
RAS#
CAS#
A2
A6
A11
RFU
NC
UDQS#/NU
V
SS
Q
DQ8
V
SS
Q
LDQS#/NU
V
SS
Q
DQ0
V
SS
Q
CK
CK#
CS#
A0
A4
A8
RFU
NC
NC
V
DD
Q
DQ15
V
DD
Q
DQ13
V
DD
Q
DQ7
V
DD
Q
DQ5
V
DD
ODT
V
DD
V
SS
NC
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
T
U
V
W
Y
AA
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 13 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Table 3: FBGA 60-Ball – x4, x8 and 84-Ball – x16 Descriptions
x16 Ball
Number
x4, x8 Ball
Number Symbol Type Description
M8, M3, M7,
N2, N8, N3,
N7, P2, P8,
P3, M2,
P7, R2
A0–A2,
A3–A5,
A6–A8,
A9, A10,
A11, A12
Input Address inputs: Provide the row address for ACTIVATE
commands, and the column address and auto precharge bit
(A10) for READ/WRITE commands, to select one location out of
the memory array in the respective bank. A10 sampled during a
PRECHARGE command determines whether the PRECHARGE
applies to one bank (A10 LOW, bank selected by BA0–BA2) or all
banks (A10 HIGH). The address inputs also provide the op-code
during a LOAD MODE command.
H8, H3, H7,
J2, J8, J3,
J7, K2, K8,
K3, H2,
K7, L2,
L8
A0–A2,
A3–A5,
A6–A8,
A9, A10,
A11, A12,
A13
Input Address inputs: Provide the row address for ACTIVATE
commands, and the column address and auto precharge bit
(A10) for READ/WRITE commands, to select one location out of
the memory array in the respective bank. A10 sampled during a
PRECHARGE command determines whether the PRECHARGE
applies to one bank (A10 LOW, bank selected by BA0–BA2) or all
banks (A10 HIGH). The address inputs also provide the op-code
during a LOAD MODE command.
L2, L3,
L1
G2, G3,
G1
BA0–BA2 Input Bank address inputs: BA0–BA2 define to which bank an
ACTIVATE, READ, WRITE, or PRECHARGE command is being
applied. BA0–BA2 define which mode register including MR,
EMR, EMR(2), and EMR(3) is loaded during the LOAD MODE
command.
J8, K8 E8, F8 CK, CK# Input Clock: CK and CK# are differential clock inputs. All address and
control input signals are sampled on the crossing of the positive
edge of CK and negative edge of CK#. Output data (DQ and
DQS/DQS#) is referenced to the crossings of CK and CK#.
K2 F2 CKE Input Clock enable: CKE (registered HIGH) activates and CKE
(registered LOW) deactivates clocking circuitry on the DDR2
SDRAM. The specific circuitry that is enabled/disabled is
dependent on the DDR2 SDRAM configuration and operating
mode. CKE LOW provides precharge power-down and SELF
REFRESH operations (all banks idle), or active power-down (row
active in any bank). CKE is synchronous for power-down entry,
power-down exit, output disable, and for self refresh entry. CKE
is asynchronous for self refresh exit. Input buffers (excluding CK,
CK#, CKE, and ODT) are disabled during power-down. Input
buffers (excluding CKE) are disabled during self refresh. CKE is
an SSTL_18 input but will detect a LVCMOS LOW level after VDD
is applied during first power-up. After VREF has become stable
during the power-on and initialization sequence, it must be
maintained for proper operation of the CKE receiver. For proper
SELF REFRESH operation, VREF must be maintained.
L8 G8 CS# Input Chip select: CS# enables (registered LOW) and disables
(registered HIGH) the command decoder. All commands are
masked when CS# is registered HIGH. CS# provides for external
bank selection on systems with multiple ranks. CS# is considered
part of the command code.
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 14 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
F3, B3 B3 LDM, UDM
DM
Input Input data mask: DM is an input mask signal for write data.
Input data is masked when DM is sampled HIGH along with that
input data during a WRITE access. DM is sampled on both edges
of DQS. Although DM balls are input-only, the DM loading is
designed to match that of DQ and DQS balls. LDM is DM for
lower byte DQ0–DQ7 and UDM is DM for upper byte
DQ8–DQ15.
K9 F9 ODT Input On-die termination: ODT (registered HIGH) enables
termination resistance internal to the DDR2 SDRAM. When
enabled, ODT is only applied to each of the following balls:
DQ0–DQ15, LDM, UDM, LDQS, LDQS#, UDQS, and UDQS# for
the x16; DQ0–DQ7, DQS, DQS#, RDQS, RDQS#, and DM for the
x8; DQ0–DQ3, DQS, DQS#, and DM for the x4. The ODT input
will be ignored if disabled via the LOAD MODE command.
K7, L7,
K3
F7, G7,
F3
RAS#, CAS#,
WE#
Input Command inputs: RAS#, CAS#, and WE# (along with CS#)
define the command being entered.
G8, G2, H7,
H3, H1, H9,
F1, F9, C8,
C2, D7, D3,
D1, D9, B1,
B9
DQ0–DQ2,
DQ3–DQ5,
DQ6–DQ8,
DQ9–DQ11,
DQ12–DQ14,
DQ15
I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for 64 Meg x 16.
C8, C2, D7,
D3, D1, D9,
B1, B9
DQ0–DQ2,
DQ3–DQ5,
DQ6–DQ7
I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for 128 Meg x 8.
C8, C2, D7,
D3
DQ0–DQ2,
DQ3
I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for 256 Meg x 4.
B7, A8 DQS, DQS# I/O Data strobe: Output with read data, input with write data for
source synchronous operation. Edge-aligned with read data,
center-aligned with write data. DQS# is only used when
differential data strobe mode is enabled via the LOAD MODE
command.
F7, E8 LDQS, LDQS# I/O Data strobe for lower byte: Output with read data, input
with write data for source synchronous operation. Edge-aligned
with read data, center-aligned with write data. LDQS# is only
used when differential data strobe mode is enabled via the
LOAD MODE command.
B7, A8 UDQS, UDQS# I/O Data strobe for upper byte: Output with read data, input
with write data for source synchronous operation. Edge-aligned
with read data, center-aligned with write data. UDQS# is only
used when differential data strobe mode is enabled via the
LOAD MODE command.
B3, A2 RDQS, RDQS# Output Redundant data strobe: For 128 Meg x 8 only. RDQS is
enabled/disabled via the LOAD MODE command to the
extended mode register (EMR). When RDQS is enabled, RDQS is
output with read data only and is ignored during write data.
When RDQS is disabled, ball B3 becomes data mask (see DM
ball). RDQS# is only used when RDQS is enabled and differential
data strobe mode is enabled.
A1, E1, M9,
R1, J9
A1, E9, L1, H9 VDD Supply Power supply: 1.8V ±0.1V.
Table 3: FBGA 60-Ball – x4, x8 and 84-Ball – x16 Descriptions (continued)
x16 Ball
Number
x4, x8 Ball
Number Symbol Type Description
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 15 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
A9, C1, C3,
C7, C9, G3, E9,
G1, G7, G9,
A9, C1, C3, C7,
C9
VDDQ Supply DQ power supply: 1.8V ±0.1V. Isolated on the device for
improved noise immunity.
J1E1V
DDL Supply DLL power supply: 1.8V ±0.1V.
J2E2V
REF Supply SSTL_18 reference voltage (VDDQ/2).
A3, E3, J3, N1,
P9
A3, E3, J1, K9 VSS Supply Ground.
J7E7V
SSDL Supply DLL ground: Isolated on the device from VSS and VSSQ.
A7, B2, B8,
D2, D8, E7, F2,
F8, H2, H8
A7, B2, B8, D2,
D8
VSSQ Supply DQ ground: Isolated on the device for improved noise
immunity.
A2, E2 NC No connect: These balls should be left unconnected.
B1, B9, D1, D9 NF No function: x8: these balls are used as DQ4–DQ7; x4: they are
no function.
A8, E8 NU Not used: For x16 only. If EMR(E10) = 0, A8 and E8 are UDQS#
and LDQS#. If EMR(E10) = 1, then A8 and E8 are not used.
A2, A8 NU Not used: For x8 only. If EMR(E10) = 0, A2 and E8 are RDQS#
and DQS#. If EMR(E10) = 1, then A2 and E8 are not used.
R8, R3, R7 L3, L7 RFU Reserved for future use: Row address bits A13 (x16 only),
A14, and A15.
Table 3: FBGA 60-Ball – x4, x8 and 84-Ball – x16 Descriptions (continued)
x16 Ball
Number
x4, x8 Ball
Number Symbol Type Description
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 16 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Table 4: 92-Ball – x4, x8, x16 Descriptions
x16 Ball
Number
x4, x8 Ball
Number Symbol Type Description
R8, R3, R7,
T2, T8, T3, T7,
U2, U8, U3,
R2, U7, V2
A0–A2,
A3–A6,
A7–A9,
A10–A12
Input Address inputs: Provide the row address for ACTIVATE
commands, and the column address and auto precharge bit (A10)
for READ/WRITE commands, to select one location out of the
memory array in the respective bank. A10 sampled during a
PRECHARGE command determines whether the PRECHARGE
applies to one bank (A10 LOW, bank selected by BA0–BA2) or all
banks (A10 HIGH). The address inputs also provide the op-code
during a LOAD MODE command.
R8, R3, R7, T2,
T8, T3, T7, U2,
U8, U3, R2,
U7, V2, V8
A0–A3,
A4–A7,
A8–A10,
A11–A13
Input Address inputs: Provide the row address for ACTIVATE
commands, and the column address and auto precharge bit (A10)
for READ/WRITE commands, to select one location out of the
memory array in the respective bank. A10 sampled during a
PRECHARGE command determines whether the PRECHARGE
applies to one bank (A10 LOW, bank selected by BA0–BA2) or all
banks (A10 HIGH). The address inputs also provide the op-code
during a LOAD MODE command.
P2, P3, P1 P2, P3, P1 BA0–BA2 Input Bank address inputs: BA0–BA2 define to which bank an
ACTIVATE, READ, WRITE, or PRECHARGE command is being
applied. BA0–BA2 define which mode register including MR, EMR,
EMR(2), and EMR(3) is loaded during the LOAD MODE command.
M8, N8 M8, N8 CK, CK# Input Clock: CK and CK# are differential clock inputs. All address and
control input signals are sampled on the crossing of the positive
edge of CK and negative edge of CK#. Output data (DQ and DQS/
DQS#) is referenced to the crossings of CK and CK#.
N2 N2 CKE Input Clock enable: CKE (registered HIGH) activates and CKE (registered
LOW) deactivates clocking circuitry on the DDR2 SDRAM. The
specific circuitry that is enabled/disabled is dependent on the
DDR2 SDRAM configuration and operating mode. CKE LOW
provides precharge power-down and SELF REFRESH operation (all
banks idle), or active power-down (row active in any bank). CKE is
synchronous for power-down entry, power-down exit, output
disable, and self refresh entry. CKE is asynchronous for self refresh
exit. Input buffers (excluding CK, CK#, CKE, and ODT) are disabled
during power-down. Input buffers (excluding CKE) are disabled
during self refresh. CKE is an SSTL_18 input but will detect a
LVCMOS LOW level after VDD is applied during first power-up.
After VREF has become stable during the power-on and
initialization sequence, it must be maintained for proper
operation of the CKE receiver. For proper SELF REFRESH operation,
VREF must be maintained.
P8 P8 CS# Input Chip select: CS# enables (registered LOW) and disables (registered
HIGH) the command decoder. All commands are masked when CS#
is registered HIGH. CS# provides for external bank selection on
systems with multiple ranks. CS# is considered part of the
command code.
J3, E3 J3 LDM, UDM,
(DM)
Input Input data mask: DM is an input mask signal for write data. Input
data is masked when DM is concurrently sampled HIGH during a
WRITE access. DM is sampled on both edges of DQS. Although DM
balls are input-only, the DM loading is designed to match that of
DQ and DQS balls. LDM is DM for lower byte DQ0–DQ7 and UDM is
DM for upper byte DQ8–DQ15.
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 17 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
N9 N9 ODT Input On-die termination: ODT (registered HIGH) enables termination
resistance internal to the DDR2 SDRAM. When enabled, ODT is
only applied to each of the following balls: DQ0–DQ15, LDM,
UDM, LDQS, LDQS#, UDQS, and UDQS# for the x16; DQ0–DQ7,
DQS, DQS#, RDQS, RDQS#, and DM for the x8; DQ0–DQ3, DQS,
DQS#, and DM for the x4. The ODT input will be ignored if
disabled via the LOAD MODE command.
N7, P7,
N3
N7, P7,
N3
RAS#, CAS#,
WE#
Input Command inputs: RAS#, CAS#, and WE# (along with CS#) define
the command being entered.
K8, K2, L7, L3,
L1, L9, J1, J9,
F8, F2, G7,
G3, G1, G9,
E1, E9
DQ0–DQ3,
DQ4–DQ7,
DQ8–DQ10,
DQ11–DQ13,
DQ14–DQ15
I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for 64 Meg x 16.
K8, K2, L7, L3,
L1, L9, J1, J9
DQ0–DQ3,
DQ4–DQ7
I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for 128 Meg x 8.
K8, K2, L7, L3 DQ0–DQ3 I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for 256 Meg x 4.
J7, H8 DQS, DQS# I/O Data strobe: Output with read data, input with write data for
source synchronous operation. Edge-aligned with read data,
center-aligned with write data. DQS# is only used when
differential data strobe mode is enabled via the LOAD MODE
command.
J7,
H8
–LDQS,
LDQS#
I/O Data strobe for lower byte: Output with read data, input with
write data for source synchronous operation. Edge-aligned with
read data, center-aligned with write data. LDQS# is only used
when differential data strobe mode is enabled via the LOAD
MODE command.
E7,
D8
UDQS,
UDQS#
I/O Data strobe for upper byte: Output with read data, input with
write data for source synchronous operation. Edge-aligned with
read data, center-aligned with write data. UDQS# is only used
when differential data strobe mode is enabled via the LOAD
MODE command.
J3, H2 RDQS, RDQS# Output Redundant data strobe: For x8 only. RDQS is enabled/disabled
via the LOAD MODE command to the extended mode register
(EMR). When RDQS is enabled, RDQS is output with read data only
and is ignored during write data. When RDQS is disabled, ball J3
becomes data mask (see DM ball). RDQS# is only used when RDQS
is enabled and differential data strobe mode is enabled.
D1, H1, M9,
R9, V1
D1, H1, M9,
R9, V1
VDD Supply Power supply: 1.8V ±0.1V.
D9, F1, F3, F7,
F9, H9, K1,
K3, K7, K9
D9, H9, K1,
K3, K7, K9
VDDQ Supply DQ power supply: 1.8V ±0.1V. Isolated on the device for
improved noise immunity.
M1 M1 VDDL Supply DLL power supply: 1.8V ±0.1V.
M2 M2 VREF Supply SSTL_18 reference voltage (VDDQ/2).
D3, H3, M3,
T1, U9
D3, H3, M3,
T1, U9
VSS Supply Ground.
M7 M7 VSSDL Supply DLL ground: Isolated on the device from VSS and VSSQ.
Table 4: 92-Ball – x4, x8, x16 Descriptions (continued)
x16 Ball
Number
x4, x8 Ball
Number Symbol Type Description
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 18 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
D7, E2, E8,
G2, G8, H7,
J2, J8, L2, L8
D7, H7, J2,
J8, L2, L8
VSSQ Supply DQ ground: Isolated on the device for improved noise immunity.
A1, A2, A8,
A9, D2, H2,
AA1, AA2,
AA8, AA9
A1, A2, A8,
A9, D2, D8,
E1–E3, E7–E9,
F1–F3, F7–F9,
G1–G3,
G7–G9, AA1,
AA2, AA8,
AA9
NC No connect: These balls should be left unconnected.
J1, J9, L1, L9,
H2
NF No function: x8: these balls are used as DQ4–DQ7; x4, they are no
function.
D8, H8 NU Not used: For x16 only. If EMR(E10) = 0, D8 and H8 are UDQS# and
LDQS#. If EMR(E10) = 1, then D8 and H8 are not used.
H2, H8 NU Not used: For x8 only. If EMR(E10) = 0, H2 and H8 are RDQS# and
DQS#. If EMR(E10) = 1, then H2 and H8 are not used.
V3, V7, V8 V3, V7 RFU Reserved for future use: Row address bits A13 (V8), A14 (V3),
and A15 (V7) are reserved.
Table 4: 92-Ball – x4, x8, x16 Descriptions (continued)
x16 Ball
Number
x4, x8 Ball
Number Symbol Type Description
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 19 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Package Dimensions
Figure 10: 60-Ball FBGA Package – x4, x8
Notes: 1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
Ball A1 ID
1.20 MAX
0.25 MIN
0.8 TYP
8 ±0.15
987 321
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
0.8 ±0.1
Seating
plane
A
8
6.4
0.12 A
60X Ø0.45
Dimensions
apply to solder
balls post reflow.
11.5 ±0.15
Ball A1 ID
0.8 TYP
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 20 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 11: 84-Ball FBGA Package – x16
Notes: 1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
Ball A1 ID
1.2 MAX
0.8 TYP
8 ±0.15
0.8 ±0.1
0.25 MIN
Seating
plane A
11.2 CTR
6.4 CTR
0.12 A
84X Ø0.45
12.5 ±0.15
Ball A1 ID
987 321
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
Dimensions
apply to solder
balls post reflow
on Ø0.33 NSMD
ball pads.
0.8 TYP
Exposed
gold-plated pad
1.0mm (MAX) X
0.7mm (NOM)
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 21 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 12: 92-Ball FBGA Package – x4, x8, x16
Notes: 1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
BALL A1 ID
SOLDER BALL
DIAMETER REFERS
TO POST REFLOW
CONDITION.
0.80
TYP
16
1.20 MAX
BALL A1 ID
0.80
TYP
11 ±0.15
6.40
92X Ø 0.45
C
L
C
L
2.40
19 ±0.15
0.8 ±0.1
Seating
plane
A
0.12 A
0.25 MIN
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 22 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
FBGA Package Capacitance
FBGA Package Capacitance
Notes: 1. This parameter is sampled. VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VREF = VSS, f = 100 MHz,
TC = 25°C, VOUT(DC) = VDDQ/2, VOUT (peak-to-peak) = 0.1V. DM input is grouped with I/O
balls, reflecting the fact that they are matched in loading.
2. The input capacitance per ball group will not differ by more than this maximum amount for
any given device.
3. ΔC are not pass/fail parameters but rather targets.
4. Reduce MAX limit by 0.25pF for -25, -25E, -187E speed devices.
5. Reduce MAX limit by 0.5pF for -3, -3E, -25, -25E, -187E speed devices.
6. The I/O capacitance per DQS and DQ byte/group will not differ by more than this maximum
amount for any given device.
Table 5: Input Capacitance
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units Notes
Input capacitance: CK, CK# CCK 1.0 2.0 pF 1
Delta input capacitance: CK, CK# CDCK –0.25pF2, 3
Input capacitance: Address balls, bank address balls, CS#,
RAS#, CAS#, WE#, CKE, ODT
CI1.0 2.0 pF 1, 4
Delta input capacitance: Address balls, bank address balls,
CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, CKE, ODT
CDI –0.25pF2, 3
Input/output capacitance: DQ, DQS, DM, NF CIO 2.5 4.0 pF 1, 5
Delta input/output capacitance: DQ, DQS, DM, NF CDIO 0.5 pF 3, 6
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 23 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – Absolute Ratings
Electrical Specifications – Absolute Ratings
Stresses greater than those listed may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a
stress rating only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions
outside those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied.
Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect reli-
ability.
Notes: 1. VDD, VDDQ, and VDDL must be within 300mV of each other at all times.
2. VREF 0.6 × VDDQ; however, VREF may be VDDQ provided that VREF 300mV.
3. Voltage on any I/O may not exceed voltage on VDDQ.
Temperature and Thermal Impedance
It is imperative that the DDR2 SDRAM devices temperature specifications, shown in
Table 7 on page 24, be maintained in order to ensure the junction temperature is in the
proper operating range to meet data sheet specifications. An important step in main-
taining the proper junction temperature is using the devices thermal impedances
correctly. The thermal impedances are listed in Table 8 on page 24 for the applicable and
available die revision and packages.
Incorrectly using thermal impedances can produce significant errors. Read Micron tech-
nical note TN-00-08, “Thermal Applications prior to using the thermal impedances
listed in Table 8 on page 24. For designs that are expected to last several years and
require the flexibility to use several DRAM die shrinks, consider using final target theta
values (rather than existing values) to account for increased thermal impedances from
the die size reduction.
The DDR2 SDRAM devices safe junction temperature range can be maintained when
the TC specification is not exceeded. In applications where the devices ambient temper-
ature is too high, use of forced air and/or heat sinks may be required in order to satisfy
the case temperature specifications.
Table 6: Absolute Maximum DC Ratings
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units Notes
VDD supply voltage relative to VSS VDD –1.0 2.3 V 1
VDDQ supply voltage relative to VSSQVDDQ –0.5 2.3 V 1, 2
VDDL supply voltage relative to VSSLVDDL–0.5 2.3 V 1
Voltage on any ball relative to VSS VIN, VOUT –0.5 2.3 V 3
Input leakage current; any input 0V VIN VDD; all other balls
not under test = 0V
II–5 5 µA
Output leakage current; 0V VOUT VDDQ; DQ and ODT
disabled
IOZ –5 5 µA
VREF leakage current; VREF = Valid VREF level IVREF –2 2 µA
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 24 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – Absolute Ratings
Notes: 1. MAX storage case temperature; TSTG is measured in the center of the package, as shown in
Figure 13. This case temperature limit is allowed to be exceeded briefly during package
reflow, as noted in Micron technical note TN-00-15, “Recommended Soldering Parameters.”
2. MAX operating case temperature; TC is measured in the center of the package, as shown in
Figure 13.
3. Device functionality is not guaranteed if the device exceeds maximum TC during operation.
4. Both temperature specifications must be satisfied.
5. Operating ambient temperature surrounding the package.
Figure 13: Example Temperature Test Point Location
Notes: 1. Thermal resistance data is based on a number of samples from multiple lots and should be
viewed as a typical number.
Table 7: Temper ature Limits
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units Notes
Storage temperature TSTG –55 150 °C 1
Operating temperature: commercial TC085°C2, 3
Operating temperature: industrial TC–40 95 °C 2, 3, 4
TA–40 85 °C 4, 5
Table 8: Thermal Impedance
Die Revision Package Substrate
θ JA (°C/W)
Airflow = 0m/s
θ JA (°C/W)
Airflow = 1m/s
θ JA (°C/W)
Airflow = 2m/s θ JB (°C/W) θ JC (°C/W)
A192-ball 2-layer 38.3 25.3 21.3 11.8 1.7
4-layer 24.7 18.1 16.0 10.8
E160-ball 2-layer 56.7 42.1 36.8 22.7 2.5
4-layer 40.2 32.8 29.9 22.1
84-ball 2-layer 52.9 41.3 35.7 21.6 2.5
4-layer 38.4 32 28.9 21.5
G160-ball 2-layer 66.5 49.6 43.1 30.3 5.9
4-layer 49.2 40.4 36.4 30
84-ball 2-layer 60.2 44.5 39.3 26.1 5.6
4-layer 44 35.7 32.8 26.1
Test point
0.5 (W)
0.5 (L)
Length (L)
Width (W)
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 25 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I
DD
Parameters
Electrical Specifications – IDD Parameters
IDD Specifications and Conditions
Table 9: Gener al I DD Parameters
IDD Parameters -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E Units
CL (IDD)7564543
tCK
tRCD (IDD)13.125 12.5 15 12 15 15 15 ns
tRC (IDD)58.125 57.5 60 57 60 60 55 ns
tRRD (IDD) - x4/x8 (1KB) 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 ns
tRRD (IDD) - x16 (2KB) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ns
tCK (IDD)1.875 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.75 5 ns
tRAS MIN (IDD)45 45 45 45 45 45 40 ns
tRAS MAX (IDD)70,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 ns
tRP (IDD)13.125 12.5 15 12 15 15 15 ns
tRFC (IDD - 256Mb) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 ns
tRFC (IDD - 512Mb) 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 ns
tRFC (IDD - 1Gb) 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 ns
tRFC (IDD - 2Gb) 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 ns
tFAW (IDD) - x4/x8 (1KB) Defined by pattern in Table 10 on page 26 ns
tFAW (IDD) - x16 (2KB) Defined by pattern in Table 10 on page 26 ns
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 26 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I
DD
Parameters
IDD7 Conditions
The detailed timings are shown below for IDD7. Where general IDD parameters in Table 9
on page 25 conflict with pattern requirements of Table 10, then Table 10 requirements
take precedence.
Notes: 1. A = active; RA = read auto precharge; D = deselect.
2. All banks are being interleaved at tRC (IDD) without violating tRRD (IDD) using a BL = 4.
3. Control and address bus inputs are stable during deselects.
Table 10: IDD7 Timing Patterns (8-Bank Interleave READ Operation)
Speed Grade IDD7 Timing Patterns
Timing patterns for 8-bank x4/x8 devices
-5E A0 RA0 A1 RA1 A2 RA2 A3 RA3 A4 RA4 A5 RA5 A6 RA6 A7 RA7
-37E A0 RA0 A1 RA1 A2 RA2 A3 RA3 D D A4 RA4 A5 RA5 A6 RA6 A7 RA7 D D
-3 A0 RA0 D A1 RA1 D A2 RA2 D A3 RA3 D D A4 RA4 D A5 RA5 D A6 RA6 D A7 RA7 D D
-3E A0 RA0 D A1 RA1 D A2 RA2 D A3 RA3 D D A4 RA4 D A5 RA5 D A6 RA6 D A7 RA7 D D
-25 A0 RA0 D A1 RA1 D A2 RA2 D A3 RA3 D D D A4 RA4 D A5 RA5 D A6 RA6 D A7 RA7 D D D
-25E A0 RA0 D A1 RA1 D A2 RA2 D A3 RA3 D D D A4 RA4 D A5 RA5 D A6 RA6 D A7 RA7 D D D
-187E A0 RA0 D D A1 RA1 D D A2 RA2 D D A3 RA3 D D D D D A4 RA4 D D A5 RA5 D D A6 RA6 D D A7 RA7 D D D
D D
Timing patterns for 8-bank x16 devices
-5E A0 RA0 A1 RA1 A2 RA2 A3 RA3 D D A4 RA4 A5 RA5 A6 RA6 A7 RA7 D D
-37E A0 RA0 D A1 RA1 D A2 RA2 D A3 RA3 D D D A4 RA4 D A5 RA5 D A6 RA6 D A7 RA7 D D D
-3 A0 RA0 D D A1 RA1 D D A2 RA2 D D A3 RA3 D D D A4 RA4 D D A5 RA5 D D A6 RA6 D D A7 RA7 D D D
-3E A0 RA0 D D A1 RA1 D D A2 RA2 D D A3 RA3 D D D A4 RA4 D D A5 RA5 D D A6 RA6 D D A7 RA7 D D D
-25 A0 RA0 D D A1 RA1 D D A2 RA2 D D A3 RA3 D D D D A4 RA4 D D A5 RA5 D D A6 RA6 D D A7 RA7 D D D D
-25E A0 RA0 D D A1 RA1 D D A2 RA2 D D A3 RA3 D D D D A4 RA4 D D A5 RA5 D D A6 RA6 D D A7 RA7 D D D D
-187E A0 RA0 D D D D A1 RA1 D D D D A2 RA2 D D D D A3 RA3 D D D D A4 RA4 D D D D A5 RA5 D D D D A6 RA6
D D D D A7 RA7 D D D D
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 27 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I
DD
Parameters
Table 11: DDR2 IDD Specifications and Conditions (Die Revision A)
Notes: 1–7 (page 30) apply to the entire table
Parameter/Condition Symbol Configuration
-25E/
-25 -3E/-3 -37E -5E Units
Operating one bank active-precharge current:
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRC = tRC (IDD),
tRAS = tRAS MIN (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH
between valid commands; address bus inputs are
switching; Data bus inputs are switching
IDD0 x4, x8 100 90 80 70 mA
x16 150 135 110 110
Operating one bank active-read-precharge
current: IOUT = 0mA; BL = 4, CL = CL (IDD), AL = 0;
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRC = tRC (IDD),
tRAS = tRAS MIN (IDD), tRCD = tRCD (IDD); CKE is
HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid commands;
address bus inputs are switching; Data pattern is
same as IDD4W
IDD1 x4, x8 110 100 95 80 mA
x16 175 160 130 125
Precharge power-down current: All banks idle;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is LOW; Other control and
address bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are
floating
IDD2Px4, x8, x167777mA
Precharge quiet standby current: All banks idle;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH; Other
control and address bus inputs are stable; Data bus
inputs are floating
IDD2Q x4, x8 65 55 41 35 mA
x16 75654540
Precharge standby current: All banks idle;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH; Other
control and address bus inputs are switching; Data
bus inputs are switching
IDD2N x4, x8 70 60 45 40 mA
x16 80705040
Active power-down current: All banks open;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is LOW; Other control and
address bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are
floating
IDD3P Fast PDN exit
MR12 = 0
50 45 40 35 mA
Slow PDN exit
MR12 = 1
18 18 18 18
Active standby current: All banks open;
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRAS = tRAS MAX (IDD), tRP = tRP
(IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid
commands; Other control and address bus inputs
are switching; Data bus inputs are switching
IDD3N x4, x8 75 70 60 45 mA
x16 85756055
Operating burst write current: All banks open,
continuous burst writes; BL = 4, CL = CL (IDD), AL = 0;
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRAS = tRAS MAX (IDD), tRP = tRP
(IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid
commands; address bus inputs are switching; Data
bus inputs are switching
IDD4W x4, x8 185 160 140 110 mA
x16 315 210 180 160
Operating burst read current: All banks open,
continuous burst reads, IOUT = 0mA; BL = 4,
CL=CL(I
DD), AL = 0; tCK = tCK (IDD),
tRAS = tRAS MAX (IDD), tRP = tRP (IDD); CKE is HIGH,
CS# is HIGH between valid commands; address bus
inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are switching
IDD4R x4, x8 190 160 145 110 mA
x16 320 220 180 160
Burst refresh current: tCK = tCK (IDD); REFRESH
command at every tRFC (IDD) interval; CKE is HIGH,
CS# is HIGH between valid commands; Other
control and address bus inputs are switching; Data
bus inputs are switching
IDD5 x4, x8 280 270 250 220 mA
x16 280 270 250 240
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 28 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I
DD
Parameters
Self refresh current: CK and CK# at 0V;
CKE 0.2V; Other control and address bus inputs
are floating; Data bus inputs are floating
IDD6x4, x8, x167777mA
IDD6L 5555
Operating bank interleave read current: All
bank interleaving reads, IOUT = 0mA; BL = 4,
CL = CL (IDD), AL = tRCD (IDD) - 1 × tCK (IDD);
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRC = tRC (IDD), tRRD = tRRD (IDD),
tRCD = tRCD (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between
valid commands; address bus inputs are stable
during deselects; Data bus inputs are switching; See
“Idd7 Conditions” on page 26 for details
IDD7 x4, x8 335 300 290 260 mA
x16 440 350 340 330
Table 11: DDR2 IDD Specifications and Conditions (Die Revision A) (continued)
Notes: 1–7 (page 30) apply to the entire table
Parameter/Condition Symbol Configuration
-25E/
-25 -3E/-3 -37E -5E Units
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 29 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I
DD
Parameters
Table 12: DDR2 IDD Specifications and Conditions (Die Revision E and G)
Notes: 1–7 (page 30) apply to the entire table
Parameter/Condition Symbol Configuration -187E
-25E/
-25
-3E/
-3 -37E -5E Units
Operating one bank active-precharge current:
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRC = tRC (IDD), tRAS = tRAS MIN (IDD);
CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid commands;
Address bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are
switching
IDD0 x4, x8 115 90 85 70 70 mA
x16 180 150 135 110 110
Operating one bank active-read-precharge current:
IOUT = 0mA; BL = 4, CL = CL (IDD), AL = 0; tCK = tCK (IDD),
tRC = tRC (IDD), tRAS = tRAS MIN (IDD), tRCD = tRCD (IDD);
CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid commands;
Address bus inputs are switching; Data pattern is same
as IDD4W
IDD1 x4, x8 130 110 100 95 90 mA
x16 210 175 130 120 115
Precharge power-down current: All banks idle;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is LOW; Other control and address
bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are floating
IDD2P x4, x8, x16 7 7 7 7 7 mA
Precharge quiet standby current: All banks idle;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH; Other control
and address bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are
floating
IDD2Q x4, x8 60 50 40 40 35 mA
x16 90 75 65 45 40
Precharge standby current: All banks idle;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH; Other control
and address bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs
are switching
IDD2N x4, x8 60 50 40 40 35 mA
x16 95 80 70 50 40
Active power-down current: All banks open;
tCK = tCK (IDD); CKE is LOW; Other control and address
bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are floating
IDD3P Fast exit
MR12 = 0
50 40 30 30 30 mA
Slow exit
MR12 = 1
10 10 10 10 10
Active standby current: All banks open;
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRAS = tRAS MAX (IDD), tRP = tRP (IDD);
CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid commands;
Other control and address bus inputs are switching;
Data bus inputs are switching
IDD3N x4, x8 70 60 55 45 40 mA
x16 95 85 75 60 55
Operating burst write current: All banks open,
continuous burst writes; BL = 4, CL = CL (IDD), AL = 0;
tCK = tCK (IDD), tRAS = tRAS MAX (IDD), tRP = tRP (IDD);
CKE is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid commands;
Address bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are
switching
IDD4W x4 190 145 120 110 90 mA
x8 210 160 135 125 105
x16 405 315 200 180 160
Operating burst read current: All banks open,
continuous burst reads, IOUT = 0mA; BL = 4,
CL = CL (IDD), AL = 0; tCK = tCK (IDD),
tRAS = tRAS MAX (IDD), tRP = tRP (IDD); CKE is HIGH, CS#
is HIGH between valid commands; Address bus inputs
are switching; Data bus inputs are switching
IDD4R x4 190 145 120 110 105 mA
x8 210 160 135 125 90
x16 420 320 220 180 160
Burst refresh current: tCK = tCK (IDD); REFRESH
command at every tRFC (IDD) interval; CKE is HIGH, CS# is
HIGH between valid commands; Other control and
address bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are
switching
IDD5 x4, x8 265 235 215 210 205 mA
x16 300 280 270 250 240
PDF: 09005aef821ae8bf/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
1Gb_DDR2_x4x8x16_D2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 30 ©2004 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I
DD
Parameters
Notes: 1. IDD specifications are tested after the device is properly initialized. 0°C TC +85°C.
VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDDL = +1.8V ±0.1V, VREF = VDDQ/2.
2. Input slew rate is specified by AC parametric test conditions (Table 9 on page 25).
3. IDD parameters are specified with ODT disabled.
4. Data bus consists of DQ, DM, DQS, DQS#, RDQS, RDQS#, LDQS, LDQS#, UDQS, and UDQS#.
IDD values must be met with all combinations of EMR bits 10 and 11.
5. Definitions for IDD conditions:
6. IDD1, IDD4R, and IDD7 require A12 in EMR to be enabled during testing.
7. The following IDDs must be derated (IDD limits increase) on IT-option and AT-option devices
when operated outside of the range 0°C TC 85°C:
Self refresh current: CK and CK# at 0V; CKE 0.2V;
Other control and address bus inputs are floating; Data
bus inputs are floating
IDD6 x4, x8, x16 7 7 7 7 7 mA
IDD6L 5 5 5 5 5
Operating bank interleave read current: All bank
interleaving reads, IOUT = 0mA; BL = 4, CL = CL (IDD),
AL = tRCD (IDD) - 1 × tCK (IDD); tCK = tCK (IDD),
tRC = tRC (IDD), tRRD = tRRD (IDD), tRCD = tRCD (IDD); CKE
is HIGH, CS# is HIGH between valid commands; Address
bus inputs are stable during deselects; Data bus inputs
are switching; See “Idd7 Conditions” on page 26 for
details
IDD7 x4, x8 425 335 280 270 260 mA
x16 520 440 350 330 300
LOW VINVIL(AC) MAX
HIGH VIN VIH(AC) MIN
Stable Inputs stable at a HIGH or LOW level
Floating Inputs at VREF = VDDQ/2
Switching Inputs changing between HIGH and LOW every other clock cycle (once per
two clocks) for address and control signals
Switching Inputs changing between HIGH and LOW every other data transfer (once per
clock) for DQ signals, not including masks or strobes
When
TC 0°C
IDD2P and IDD3P (slow) must be derated by 4 percent; IDD4R and IDD5W must be
derated by 2 percent; and IDD6 and IDD7 must be derated by 7 percent
When
TC 85°C
IDD0, IDD1, IDD2N, IDD2Q, IDD3N, IDD3P (fast), IDD4R, IDD4W, and IDD5W must be
derated by 2 percent; IDD2P must be derated by 20 percent; IDD3Pslow must be
derated by 30 percent; and IDD6 must be derated by 80 percent (IDD6 will
increase by this amount if TC < 85°C and the 2X refresh option is still enabled)
Table 12: DDR2 IDD Specifications and Conditions (Die Revision E and G) (continued)
Notes: 1–7 (page 30) apply to the entire table
Parameter/Condition Symbol Configuration -187E
-25E/
-25
-3E/
-3 -37E -5E Units
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 31 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 1 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Clock
Clock cycle
time
CL = 7 tCK
(AVG)
1.8758.0––––––––––––ns6, 7, 8,
9
CL = 6 tCK
(AVG)
2.58.02.58.02.58.0––––––––
CL = 5 tCK
(AVG)
3.0 8.0 2.5 8.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 8.0
CL = 4 tCK
(AVG)
3.75 8.0 3.75 8.0 3.0 8.0 3.75 8.0 3.75 8.0 5.0 8.0
CL = 3 tCK
(AVG)
––––––5.08.05.08.05.08.0
CK high-level
width
tCH
(AVG)
0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 tCK 10
CK low-level width tCL
(AVG)
0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 0.48 0.52 tCK
Half clock period tHP MIN = lesser of
t
CH and
t
CL
MAX = n/a
ps 11
Absolute tCK tCK
(ABS)
MIN = tCK (AVG) MIN + tJITPER (MIN)
MAX = tCK (AVG) MAX + tJITPER (MAX)
ps
Absolute CK high-
level width
tCH
(ABS)
MIN = tCK (AVG) MIN × tCH (AVG) MIN + tJITDTY (MIN)
MAX = tCK (AVG) MAX × tCH (AVG) MAX + tJITDTY (MAX)
ps
Absolute CK low-
level width
tCL
(ABS)
MIN = tCK (AVG) MIN × tCL (AVG) MIN + tJITDTY (MIN)
MAX = tCK (AVG) MAX × tCL (AVG) MAX + tJITDTY (MAX)
ps
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 32 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Clock Jitter
Period jitter tJITPER –90 90 –100 100 –100 100 –125 125 –125 125 –125 125 –125 125 ps 12
Half period tJITDTY –75 75 –100 100 –100 100 –125 125 –125 125 –125 125 –150 150 ps 13
Cycle to cycle tJITCC 180 200 200 250 250 250 250 ps 14
Cumulative error,
2 cycles
tERR2PER –132 132 –150 150 –150 150 –175 175 –175 175 –175 175 –175 175 ps 15
Cumulative error,
3 cycles
tERR3PER –157 157 –175 175 –175 175 –225 225 –225 225 –225 225 –225 225 ps 15
Cumulative error,
4 cycles
tERR4PER –175 175 –200 200 –200 200 –250 250 –250 250 –250 250 –250 250 ps 15
Cumulative error,
5 cycles
tERR5PER –188 188 200 200 –200 200 –250 250 –250 250 –250 250 –250 250 ps 15, 16
Cumulative error,
6–10 cycles
tERR6–
10PER
–250 250 –300 300 –300 300 –350 350 –350 350 –350 350 –350 350 ps 15, 16
Cumulative error,
11–50 cycles
tERR11–
50PER
–425 425 –450 450 –450 450 –450 450 –450 450 –450 450 –450 450 ps 15
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 2 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 33 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Data Strobe-Out
DQS output access
time from CK/CK#
tDQSCK –300 +300 –350 +350 –350 +350 –400 +400 –400 +400 –450 +450 –500 +500 ps 19
DQS read
preamble
tRPRE MIN = 0.9 × tCK
MAX = 1.1 × tCK
tCK 17,
18, 19
DQS read
postamble
tRPST MIN = 0.4 × tCK
MAX = 0.6 × tCK
tCK 17,
18,
19, 20
CK/CK# to DQS
Low-Z
tLZ1MIN = tAC (MIN)
MAX = tAC (MAX)
ps 19,
21, 22
Data Strobe-In
DQS rising edge to
CK rising edge
tDQSS MIN = –0.25 × tCK
MAX = +0.25 × tCK
tCK 18
DQS input-high
pulse width
tDQSH MIN = 0.35 × tCK
MAX = n/a
tCK 18
DQS input-low
pulse width
tDQSL MIN = 0.35 × tCK
MAX = n/a
tCK 18
DQS falling to CK
rising: setup time
tDSS MIN = 0.2 × tCK
MAX = n/a
tCK 18
DQS falling from
CK rising: hold
time
tDSH MIN = 0.2 × tCK
MAX = n/a
tCK 18
Write preamble
setup time
tWPRES MIN = 0
MAX = n/a
ps 23, 24
DQS write
preamble
tWPRE MIN = 0.35 × tCK
MAX = n/a
tCK 18
DQS write
postamble
tWPST MIN = 0.4 × tCK
MAX = 0.6 × tCK
tCK 18, 25
WRITE command
to first DQS
transition
MIN = WL - tDQSS
MAX = WL + tDQSS
tCK
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 3 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 34 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Data-Out
DQ output access
time from CK/CK#
tAC –350 +350 –400 +400 –400 +400 –450 +450 –450 +450 –500 +500 –600 +600 ps 19
DQS–DQ skew,
DQS to last DQ
valid, per group,
per access
tDQSQ 175 200 200 240 240 300 350 ps 26, 27
DQ hold from next
DQS strobe
tQHS 250 300 300 340 340 400 450 ps 28
DQ–DQS hold, DQS
to first DQ not
valid
tQH MIN = tHP - tQHS
MAX = n/a
ps 26,
27, 28
CK/CK# to DQ, DQS
High-Z
tHZ MIN = n/a
MAX = tAC (MAX)
ps 19,
21, 29
CK/CK# to DQ
Low-Z
tLZ2MIN = 2 × tAC (MIN)
MAX = tAC (MAX)
ps 19,
21, 22
Data valid output
window
DVW MIN = tQH - tDQSQ
MAX = n/a
ns 26, 27
Data-In
DQ and DM input
setup time to DQS
tDSb0 50 50 100 100 100 150 ps 26,
30, 31
DQ and DM input
hold time to DQS
tDHb75 125 125 175 175 225 275 ps 26,
30, 31
DQ and DM input
setup time to DQS
tDSa200 250 250 300 300 350 400 ps 26,
30, 31
DQ and DM input
hold time to DQS
tDHa200 250 250 300 300 350 400 ps 26,
30, 31
DQ and DM input
pulse width
tDIPW MIN = 0.35 × tCK
MAX = n/a
tCK 18, 32
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 4 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 35 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Command and Address
Input setup time tISb125 175 175 200 200 250 350 ps 31, 33
Input hold time tIHb200 250 250 275 275 375 475 ps 31, 33
Input setup time tISa325 375 375 400 400 500 600 ps 31, 33
Input hold time tIHa325 375 375 400 400 500 600 ps 31, 33
Input pulse width tIPW 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 tCK 18, 32
ACTIVATE-to-
ACTIVATE delay,
same bank
tRC 54 55 55 54 55 55 55 ns 18, 34
ACTIVATE-to-READ
or WRITE delay
tRCD 13.125 12.5 15 12 15 15 15 ns 18
ACTIVATE-to-
PRECHARGE delay
tRAS 40 70K 40 70K 40 70K 40 70K 40 70K 40 70K 40 70K ns 18,
34, 35
PRECHARGE period tRP 13.125 12.5 15 12 15 15 15 ns 18, 36
PRECHAR
GE ALL
period
<1Gb tRPA 13.125 12.5 15 12 15 15 15 ns 18, 36
>1Gb tRPA 15 15 17.5 15 18 18.75 20 ns 18, 36
ACTIVATE-
to-
ACTIVATE
delay
different
bank
x4, x8 tRRD 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 ns 18, 37
x16 tRRD10 10–10–10–10–10–10–ns18, 37
4-bank
activate
period
x4, x8 tFAW 35 35 35 37.5 37.5 37.5 37.5 ns 18, 38
x16 tFAW45 45–45–50–50–50–50–ns18, 38
Internal READ-to-
PRECHARGE delay
tRTP 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 ns 18,
37, 39
CAS#-to-CAS#
delay
tCCD2 2–2–2–2–2–2–
tCK 18
Write recovery
time
tWR 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 ns 18, 37
Write AP recovery
+ precharge time
tDAL tWR +
tRP
tWR +
tRP
tWR +
tRP
tWR +
tRP
tWR +
tRP
tWR +
tRP
tWR +
tRP
–ns40
Internal WRITE-to-
READ delay
tWTR 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 ns 18, 37
LOAD MODE cycle
time
tMRD2 2–2–2–2–2–2–
tCK 18
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 5 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 36 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Refresh
REFRESH-
to-
ACTIVATE
or to-
REFRESH
interval
256Mb tRFC75 757575757575ns18, 41
512Mb 105 105 105 105 105 105 105
1Gb 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5 127.5
2Gb 197.5 197.5 197.5 197.5 197.5 197.5 197.5
Average periodic
refresh
(commercial)
tREFI 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 µs 18, 41
Average periodic
refresh (industrial)
tREFIIT 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 µs 18, 41
Average periodic
refresh
(automotive)
tREFIAT 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 µs 18, 41
CKE LOW to CK,
CK# uncertainty
tDELAY MIN limit = tIS + tCK + tIH
MAX limit = n/a
ns 42
Self Refresh
Exit SELF REFRESH
to nonREAD
command
tXSNR MIN limit = tRFC (MIN) + 10
MAX limit = n/a
ns
Exit SELF REFRESH
to READ command
tXSRD MIN limit = 200
MAX limit = n/a
tCK 18
Exit SELF REFRESH
timing reference
tISXR MIN limit = tIS
MAX limit = n/a
ps 33, 43
Power-Down
Exit active
power-
down to
READ
command
MR12
= 0
tXARD3 2–2–2–2–2–2–
tCK 18
MR12
= 1
10 -
AL
8 - AL–8 - AL–7 - AL–7 - AL–6 - AL–6 - AL– tCK 18
Exit precharge
power-down to
any nonREAD
command
tXP 3 2–2–2–2–2–2–
tCK 18
CKE MIN HIGH/
LOW time
tCKE MIN = 3
MAX = n/a
tCK 18, 44
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 6 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 37 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
ODT
ODT to power-
down entry latency
tANPD4 3–3–3–3–3–3–
tCK 18
ODT power-down
exit latency
tAXPD11 1010–8–8–8–8–
tCK 18
ODT turn-on delay tAOND 2 tCK 18
ODT turn-off delay tAOFD 2.5 tCK 18, 45
ODT turn-on tAON tAC
(MIN)
tAC
(MAX)
+ 2,575
MIN = tAC (MIN)
MAX = tAC (MAX) + 600
MIN = tAC (MIN)
MAX = tAC (MAX) + 700
MIN = tAC (MIN)
MAX = tAC (MAX) + 1,000
ps 19, 46
ODT turn-off tAOF MIN = tAC (MIN)
MAX = tAC (MAX) + 600
ps 47, 48
ODT turn-on
(power-down
mode)
tAONPD tAC
(MIN)
+ 2,000
2 ×
tCK +
tAC
(MAX)
+
1,000
MIN = tAC (MIN) + 2,000
MAX = 2 × tCK + tAC (MAX) + 1,000
ps 49
ODT turn-off
(power-down
mode)
tAOFPD MIN = tAC (MIN) + 2,000
MAX = 2.5 × tCK + tAC (MAX) + 1,000
ps
ODT enable from
MRS command
tMOD MIN = 12
MAX = n/a
ns 18, 50
Table 13: AC Operating Specifications and Conditions for -187E, -25E, -3E, -3, -37E, and -5E Speeds (Sheet 7 of 7)
Not all speed grades listed may be supported for this device; refer to the title page for speeds supported;
Notes: 1–5 (page 38) apply to the entire table; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V
AC Characteristics -187E -25E -25 -3E -3 -37E -5E
Units NotesParameter Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 38 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
Notes
1. All voltages are referenced to VSS.
2. Tests for AC timing, IDD, and electrical AC and DC characteristics may be conducted
at nominal reference/supply voltage levels, but the related specifications and the
operation of the device are warranted for the full voltage range specified. ODT is dis-
abled for all measurements that are not ODT-specific.
3. Outputs measured with equivalent load (see Figure 17 on page 46).
4. AC timing and IDD tests may use a VIL-to-VIH swing of up to 1.0V in the test environ-
ment, and parameter specifications are guaranteed for the specified AC input levels
under normal use conditions. The slew rate for the input signals used to test the
device is 1.0 V/ns for signals in the range between VIL(AC) and VIH(AC). Slew rates
other than 1.0 V/ns may require the timing parameters to be derated as specified.
5. The AC and DC input level specifications are as defined in the SSTL_18 standard (that
is, the receiver will effectively switch as a result of the signal crossing the AC input
level and will remain in that state as long as the signal does not ring back above
[below] the DC input LOW [HIGH] level).
6. CK and CK# input slew rate is referenced at 1 V/ns (2 V/ns if measured differentially).
7. Operating frequency is only allowed to change during self refresh mode (see Figure 80
on page 117), precharge power-down mode, or system reset condition (see "Reset" on
page 118). SSC allows for small deviations in operating frequency, provided the SSC
guidelines are satisfied.
8. The clocks tCK (AVG) is the average clock over any 200 consecutive clocks and
tCK (AVG) MIN is the smallest clock rate allowed (except for a deviation due to
allowed clock jitter). Input clock jitter is allowed provided it does not exceed values
specified. Also, the jitter must be of a random Gaussian distribution in nature.
9. Spread spectrum is not included in the jitter specification values. However, the input
clock can accommodate spread spectrum at a sweep rate in the range 20–60 KHz with
an additional one percent tCK (AVG); however, the spread spectrum may not use a
clock rate below tCK (AVG) MIN or above tCK (AVG) MAX.
10. MIN (tCL, tCH) refers to the smaller of the actual clock LOW time and the actual clock
HIGH time driven to the device. The clock’s half period must also be of a Gaussian dis-
tribution; tCH (AVG) and tCL (AVG) must be met with or without clock jitter and with
or without duty cycle jitter. tCH (AVG) and tCL (AVG) are the average of any 200 con-
secutive CK falling edges.
11. tHP (MIN) is the lesser of tCL and tCH actually applied to the device CK and CK#
inputs; thus, tHP (MIN) the lesser of tCL (ABS) MIN and tCH (ABS) MIN.
12. The period jitter (tJITPER) is the maximum deviation in the clock period from the aver-
age or nominal clock allowed in either the positive or negative direction. JEDEC spec-
ifies tighter jitter numbers during DLL locking time. During DLL lock time, the jitter
values should be 20 percent less those than noted in the table (DLL locked).
13. The half-period jitter (tJITDTY) applies to either the high pulse of clock or the low
pulse of clock; however, the two cumulatively can not exceed tJITPER.
14. The cycle-to-cycle jitter (tJITCC) is the amount the clock period can deviate from one
cycle to the next. JEDEC specifies tighter jitter numbers during DLL locking time.
During DLL lock time, the jitter values should be 20 percent less than those noted in
the table (DLL locked).
15. The cumulative jitter error (tERRnPER), where n is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6–10, or 11–50 is the
amount of clock time allowed to consecutively accumulate away from the average
clock over any number of clock cycles.
16. JEDEC specifies using tERR6–10PER when derating clock-related output timing (see
notes 19 and 48). Micron requires less derating by allowing tERR5PER to be used.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 39 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
17. This parameter is not referenced to a specific voltage level but is specified when the
device output is no longer driving (tRPST) or beginning to drive (tRPRE).
18. The inputs to the DRAM must be aligned to the associated clock, that is, the actual
clock that latches it in. However, the input timing (in ns) references to the tCK (AVG)
when determining the required number of clocks. The following input parameters are
determined by taking the specified percentage times the tCK (AVG) rather than tCK:
tIPW, tDIPW, tDQSS, tDQSH, tDQSL, tDSS, tDSH, tWPST, and tWPRE.
19. The DRAM output timing is aligned to the nominal or average clock. Most output
parameters must be derated by the actual jitter error when input clock jitter is
present; this will result in each parameter becoming larger. The following parameters
are required to be derated by subtracting tERR5PER (MAX): tAC (MIN), tDQSCK (MIN),
tLZDQS (MIN), tLZDQ (MIN), tAON (MIN); while the following parameters are required
to be derated by subtracting tERR5PER (MIN): tAC (MAX), tDQSCK (MAX), tHZ (MAX),
tLZDQS (MAX), tLZDQ (MAX), tAON (MAX). The parameter tRPRE (MIN) is derated by
subtracting tJITPER (MAX), while tRPRE (MAX), is derated by subtracting
tJITPER (MIN). The parameter tRPST (MIN) is derated by subtracting tJITDTY (MAX),
while tRPST (MAX), is derated by subtracting tJITDTY (MIN). Output timings that
require tERR5PER derating can be observed to have offsets relative to the clock; how-
ever, the total window will not degrade.
20. When DQS is used single-ended, the minimum limit is reduced by 100ps.
21. tHZ and tLZ transitions occur in the same access time windows as valid data transi-
tions. These parameters are not referenced to a specific voltage level, but specify
when the device output is no longer driving (tHZ) or begins driving (tLZ).
22. tLZ (MIN) will prevail over a tDQSCK (MIN) + tRPRE (MAX) condition.
23. This is not a device limit. The device will operate with a negative value, but system
performance could be degraded due to bus turnaround.
24. It is recommended that DQS be valid (HIGH or LOW) on or before the WRITE com-
mand. The case shown (DQS going from High-Z to logic LOW) applies when no
WRITEs were previously in progress on the bus. If a previous WRITE was in progress,
DQS could be HIGH during this time, depending on tDQSS.
25. The intent of the “Dont Care” state after completion of the postamble is that the DQS-
driven signal should either be HIGH, LOW, or High-Z, and that any signal transition
within the input switching region must follow valid input requirements. That is, if
DQS transitions HIGH (above VIH[DC] MIN), then it must not transition LOW (below
VIH[DC]) prior to tDQSH (MIN).
26. Referenced to each output group: x4 = DQS with DQ0–DQ3; x8 = DQS with DQ0–DQ7;
x16 = LDQS with DQ0–DQ7; and UDQS with DQ8–DQ15.
27. The data valid window is derived by achieving other specifications: tHP (tCK/2),
tDQSQ, and tQH (tQH = tHP - tQHS). The data valid window derates in direct propor-
tion to the clock duty cycle and a practical data valid window can be derived.
28. tQH = tHP - tQHS; the worst case tQH would be the lesser of tCL (ABS) MAX or
tCH (ABS) MAX times tCK (ABS) MIN - tQHS. Minimizing the amount of tCH (AVG)
offset and value of tJITDTY will provide a larger tQH, which in turn will provide a larger
valid data out window.
29. This maximum value is derived from the referenced test load. tHZ (MAX) will prevail
over tDQSCK (MAX) + tRPST (MAX) condition.
30. The values listed are for the differential DQS strobe (DQS and DQS#) with a differen-
tial slew rate of 2 V/ns (1 V/ns for each signal). There are two sets of values listed: tDSa,
tDHa and tDSb, tDHb. The tDSa, tDHa values (for reference only) are equivalent to the
baseline values of tDSb, tDHb at VREF when the slew rate is 2 V/ns, differentially. The
baseline values, tDSb, tDHb, are the JEDEC-defined values, referenced from the logic
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 40 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Timing Operating Specifications
trip points. tDSb is referenced from VIH(AC) for a rising signal and VIL(AC) for a falling
signal, while tDHb is referenced from VIL(DC) for a rising signal and VIH(DC) for a fall-
ing signal. If the differential DQS slew rate is not equal to 2 V/ns, then the baseline val-
ues must be derated by adding the values from Tables 32 and 33 on pages 58–59. If the
DQS differential strobe feature is not enabled, then the DQS strobe is single-ended
and the baseline values must be derated using Table 34 on page 60. Single-ended DQS
data timing is referenced at DQS crossing VREF. The correct timing values for a single-
ended DQS strobe are listed in Tables 35–37 on pages 60–61; listed values are already
derated for slew rate variations and converted from baseline values to VREF values.
31. VIL/VIH DDR2 overshoot/undershoot. See “AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification
on page 52.
32. For each input signal—not the group collectively.
33. There are two sets of values listed for command/address: tISa, tIHa and tISb, tIHb. The
tISa, tIHa values (for reference only) are equivalent to the baseline values of tISb, tIHb
at VREF when the slew rate is 1 V/ns. The baseline values, tISb, tIHb, are the JEDEC-
defined values, referenced from the logic trip points. tISb is referenced from VIH(AC)
for a rising signal and VIL(AC) for a falling signal, while tIHb is referenced from VIL(DC)
for a rising signal and VIH(DC) for a falling signal. If the command/address slew rate is
not equal to 1 V/ns, then the baseline values must be derated by adding the values
from Tables 30 and 31 on page 55.
34. This is applicable to READ cycles only. WRITE cycles generally require additional time
due to tWR during auto precharge.
35. READs and WRITEs with auto precharge are allowed to be issued before tRAS (MIN) is
satisfied because tRAS lockout feature is supported in DDR2 SDRAM.
36. When a single-bank PRECHARGE command is issued, tRP timing applies. tRPA timing
applies when the PRECHARGE (ALL) command is issued, regardless of the number of
banks open. For 8-bank devices (1Gb), tRPA (MIN) = tRP (MIN) + tCK (AVG) (Table 13
on page 31 lists tRP [MIN] + tCK [AVG] MIN).
37. This parameter has a two clock minimum requirement at any tCK.
38. The tFAW (MIN) parameter applies to all 8-bank DDR2 devices. No more than four
bank-ACTIVATE commands may be issued in a given tFAW (MIN) period. tRRD (MIN)
restriction still applies.
39. The minimum internal READ-to-PRECHARGE time. This is the time from which the
last 4-bit prefetch begins to when the PRECHARGE command can be issued. A 4-bit
prefetch is when the READ command internally latches the READ so that data will
output CL later. This parameter is only applicable when tRTP/(2 × tCK) > 1, such as
frequencies faster than 533 MHz when tRTP = 7.5ns. If tRTP/(2 × tCK) 1, then equa-
tion AL + BL/2 applies. tRAS (MIN) has to be satisfied as well. The DDR2 SDRAM will
automatically delay the internal PRECHARGE command until tRAS (MIN) has been
satisfied.
40. tDAL = (nWR) + (tRP/tCK). Each of these terms, if not already an integer, should be
rounded up to the next integer. tCK refers to the application clock period; nWR refers
to the tWR parameter stored in the MR9–MR11 For example, -37E at tCK = 3.75ns with
tWR programmed to four clocks would have tDAL = 4 + (15ns/3.75ns) clocks =
4 + (4) clocks = 8 clocks.
41. The refresh period is 64ms (commercial) or 32ms (industrial and automotive). This
equates to an average refresh rate of 7.8125µs (commercial) or 3.9607µs (industrial
and automotive). To ensure all rows of all banks are properly refreshed, 8,192
REFRESH commands must be issued every 64ms (commercial) or 32ms (industrial
and automotive). The JEDEC tRFC MAX of 70,000ns is not required as bursting of
AUTO REFRESH commands is allowed.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 41 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC and DC Operating Conditions
42. tDELAY is calculated from tIS + tCK + tIH so that CKE registration LOW is guaranteed
prior to CK, CK# being removed in a system RESET condition (see "Reset" on page
118).
43. tISXR is equal to tIS and is used for CKE setup time during self refresh exit, as shown in
Figure 70 on page 109.
44. tCKE (MIN) of three clocks means CKE must be registered on three consecutive posi-
tive clock edges. CKE must remain at the valid input level the entire time it takes to
achieve the three clocks of registration. Thus, after any CKE transition, CKE may not
transition from its valid level during the time period of tIS + 2 × tCK + tIH.
45. The half-clock of tAOFDs 2.5 tCK assumes a 50/50 clock duty cycle. This half-clock
value must be derated by the amount of half-clock duty cycle error. For example, if the
clock duty cycle was 47/53, tAOFD would actually be 2.5 - 0.03, or 2.47, for tAOF (MIN)
and 2.5 + 0.03, or 2.53, for tAOF (MAX).
46. ODT turn-on time tAON (MIN) is when the device leaves High-Z and ODT resistance
begins to turn on. ODT turn-on time tAON (MAX) is when the ODT resistance is fully
on. Both are measured from tAOND.
47. ODT turn-off time tAOF (MIN) is when the device starts to turn off ODT resistance.
ODT turn off time tAOF (MAX) is when the bus is in High-Z. Both are measured from
tAOFD.
48. Half-clock output parameters must be derated by the actual tERR5PER and tJITDTY
when input clock jitter is present; this will result in each parameter becoming larger.
The parameter tAOF (MIN) is required to be derated by subtracting both
tERR5PER (MAX) and tJITDTY (MAX). The parameter tAOF (MAX) is required to be der-
ated by subtracting both tERR5PER (MIN) and tJITDTY (MIN).
49. The -187E maximum limit is 2 × tCK + tAC (MAX) + 1,000 but it will likely be
3xtCK + tAC (MAX) + 1,000 in the future.
50. Should use 8 tCK for backward compatibility.
AC and DC Operating Conditions
Notes: 1. VDD and VDDQ must track each other. VDDQ must be VDD.
2. VSSQ = VSSL = VSS.
3. VDDQ tracks with VDD; VDDL tracks with VDD.
4. VREF is expected to equal VDDQ/2 of the transmitting device and to track variations in the
DC level of the same. Peak-to-peak noise (noncommon mode) on VREF may not exceed ±1
percent of the DC value. Peak-to-peak AC noise on VREF may not exceed ±2 percent of
VREF(DC). This measurement is to be taken at the nearest VREF bypass capacitor.
5. VTT is not applied directly to the device. VTT is a system supply for signal termination resis-
tors, is expected to be set equal to VREF, and must track variations in the DC level of VREF.
Table 14: Recommended DC Operating Conditions (SSTL_18)
All voltages referenced to VSS
Parameter Symbol Min Nom Max Units Notes
Supply voltage VDD 1.7 1.8 1.9 V 1, 2
VDDL supply voltage VDDL 1.7 1.8 1.9 V 2, 3
I/O supply voltage VDDQ 1.7 1.8 1.9 V 2, 3
I/O reference voltage VREF(DC) 0.49 × VDDQ 0.50 × VDDQ 0.51 × VDDQV 4
I/O termination voltage (system) VTT VREF(DC) - 40 VREF(DC)VREF(DC) + 40 mV 5
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 42 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
ODT DC Electrical Characteristics
ODT DC Electrical Characteristics
Notes: 1. RTT1(EFF) and RTT2(EFF) are determined by separately applying VIH(AC) and VIL(AC) to the ball
being tested, and then measuring current, I(VIH(AC)), and I(VIL(AC)), respectively.
(EQ 1)
2. Minimum IT and AT device values are derated by six percent when the devices operate
between –40°C and 0°C (TC).
3. Measure voltage (VM) at tested ball with no load.
(EQ 2)
Input Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Notes: 1. VDDQ + 300mV allowed provided 1.9V is not exceeded.
Notes: 1. VDDQ + 300mV allowed provided 1.9V is not exceeded.
Table 15: ODT DC Electrical Characteristics
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter Symbol Min Nom Max Units Notes
RTT effective impedance value for 75Ω setting
EMR (A6, A2) = 0, 1
RTT1(EFF)607590Ω1, 2
RTT effective impedance value for 150Ω setting
EMR (A6, A2) = 1, 0
RTT2(EFF) 120 150 180 Ω1, 2
RTT effective impedance value for 50Ω setting
EMR (A6, A2) = 1, 1
RTT3(EFF)405060Ω1, 2
Deviation of VM with respect to VDDQ/2 ΔVM –6 6 % 3
Table 16: Input DC Logic Levels
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units
Input high (logic 1) voltage VIH(DC)VREF(DC) + 125 VDDQ1mV
Input low (logic 0) voltage VIL(DC) –300 VREF(DC) - 125 mV
Table 17: Input AC Logic Levels
All voltages referenced to VSS
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units
Input high (logic 1) voltage (-37E/-5E) VIH(AC)VREF(DC) + 250 VDDQ1mV
Input high (logic 1) voltage (-187E/-25E/-25/-3E/-3) VIH(AC)VREF(DC) + 200 VDDQ1mV
Input low (logic 0) voltage (-37E/-5E) VIL(AC)–300VREF(DC) - 250 mV
Input low (logic 0) voltage (-187E/-25E/-25/-3E/-3) VIL(AC)–300VREF(DC) - 200 mV
RTT EFF() VIH AC()VIL AC()
IV
IH AC()()IVIL AC()()
-------------------------------------------------------------
=
ΔVM 2VM×
VDDQ
------------------1
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
100×=
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 43 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Figure 14: Single-Ended Input Signal Levels
Notes: 1. Numbers in diagram reflect nominal DDR2-400/DDR2-533 values.
650mV
775mV
864mV
882mV
900mV
918mV
936mV
1,025mV
1,150mV
VIL(AC)
VIL(DC)
VREF - AC noise
VREF - DC error
VREF + DC error
VREF + AC noise
VIH(DC)
VIH(AC)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 44 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Notes: 1. VIN(DC) specifies the allowable DC execution of each input of differential pair such as CK,
CK#, DQS, DQS#, LDQS, LDQS#, UDQS, UDQS#, and RDQS, RDQS#.
2. VID(DC) specifies the input differential voltage |VTR - VCP| required for switching, where VTR
is the true input (such as CK, DQS, LDQS, UDQS) level and VCP is the complementary input
(such as CK#, DQS#, LDQS#, UDQS#) level. The minimum value is equal to VIH(DC) - VIL(DC).
Differential input signal levels are shown in Figure 15.
3. VID(AC) specifies the input differential voltage |VTR - VCP| required for switching, where VTR
is the true input (such as CK, DQS, LDQS, UDQS, RDQS) level and VCP is the complementary
input (such as CK#, DQS#, LDQS#, UDQS#, RDQS#) level. The minimum value is equal to
VIH(AC) - VIL(AC), as shown in Table 17 on page 42.
4. The typical value of VIX(AC) is expected to be about 0.5 × VDDQ of the transmitting device
and VIX(AC) is expected to track variations in VDDQ. VIX(AC) indicates the voltage at which
differential input signals must cross, as shown in Figure 15.
5. VMP(DC) specifies the input differential common mode voltage (VTR + VCP)/2 where VTR is
the true input (CK, DQS) level and VCP is the complementary input (CK#, DQS#). VMP(DC) is
expected to be approximately 0.5 × VDDQ.
6. VDDQ + 300mV allowed provided 1.9V is not exceeded.
Figure 15: Differential Input Signal Levels
Notes: 1. TR and CP may not be more positive than VDDQ + 0.3V or more negative than VSS - 0.3V.
2. TR represents the CK, DQS, RDQS, LDQS, and UDQS signals; CP represents CK#, DQS#,
RDQS#, LDQS#, and UDQS# signals.
3. This provides a minimum of 850mV to a maximum of 950mV and is expected to be VDDQ/2.
4. TR and CP must cross in this region.
5. TR and CP must meet at least VID(DC) MIN when static and is centered around VMP(DC).
6. TR and CP must have a minimum 500mV peak-to-peak swing.
7. Numbers in diagram reflect nominal values (VDDQ = 1.8V).
Table 18: Differential Input Logic Levels
All voltages referenced to VSS
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units Notes
DC input signal voltage VIN(DC)–300 VDDQmV1, 6
DC differential input voltage VID(DC) 250 VDDQmV2, 6
AC differential input voltage VID(AC) 500 VDDQmV3, 6
AC differential cross-point voltage VIX(AC) 0.50 × VDDQ - 175 0.50 × VDDQ + 175 mV 4
Input midpoint voltage VMP(DC) 850 950 mV 5
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 45 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Output Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Output Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Notes: 1. The typical value of VOX(AC) is expected to be about 0.5 × VDDQ of the transmitting device
and VOX(AC) is expected to track variations in VDDQ. VOX(AC) indicates the voltage at which
differential output signals must cross.
Figure 16: Differential Output Signal Levels
Notes: 1. For IOH(DC); VDDQ = 1.7V, VOUT = 1,420mV. (VOUT - VDDQ)/IOH must be less than 21Ω for val-
ues of VOUT between VDDQ and VDDQ - 280mV.
2. For IOL(DC); VDDQ = 1.7V, VOUT = 280mV. VOUT/IOL must be less than 21Ω for values of VOUT
between 0V and 280mV.
3. The DC value of VREF applied to the receiving device is set to VTT.
4. The values of IOH(DC) and IOL(DC) are based on the conditions given in Notes 1 and 2. They
are used to test device drive current capability to ensure VIH (MIN) plus a noise margin and
VIL (MAX) minus a noise margin are delivered to an SSTL_18 receiver. The actual current val-
ues are derived by shifting the desired driver operating point (see output IV curves) along a
21Ω load line to define a convenient driver current for measurement.
Table 19: Differential AC Output Parameters
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units Notes
AC differential cross-point voltage VOX(AC) 0.50 × VDDQ - 125 0.50 × VDDQ + 125 mV 1
AC differential voltage swing VSWING 1.0 mV
Table 20: Output DC Current Drive
Parameter Symbol Value Units Notes
Output MIN source DC current IOH –13.4 mA 1, 2, 4
Output MIN sink DC current IOL 13.4 mA 2, 3, 4
Crossing point
VOX
VSSQ
VSWING
VDDQ
VTR
VCP
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 46 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Output Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Notes: 1. Absolute specifications: 0°C TC +85°C; VDDQ = +1.8V ±0.1V, VDD = +1.8V ±0.1V.
2. Impedance measurement conditions for output source DC current: VDDQ = 1.7V;
VOUT = 1,420mV; (VOUT - VDDQ)/IOH must be less than 23.4Ω for values of VOUT between
VDDQ and VDDQ - 280mV. The impedance measurement condition for output sink DC cur-
rent: VDDQ = 1.7V; VOUT = 280mV; VOUT/IOL must be less than 23.4Ω for values of VOUT
between 0V and 280mV.
3. Mismatch is an absolute value between pull-up and pull-down; both are measured at the
same temperature and voltage.
4. Output slew rate for falling and rising edges is measured between VTT - 250mV and
VTT + 250mV for single-ended signals. For differential signals (DQS, DQS#), output slew rate
is measured between DQS - DQS# = –500mV and DQS# - DQS = +500mV. Output slew rate is
guaranteed by design but is not necessarily tested on each device.
5. The absolute value of the slew rate as measured from VIL(DC) MAX to VIH(DC) MIN is equal to
or greater than the slew rate as measured from VIL(AC) MAX to VIH(AC) MIN. This is guaran-
teed by design and characterization.
6. IT and AT devices require an additional 0.4 V/ns in the MAX limit when TC is between –40°C
and 0°C.
Figure 17: Output Slew Rate Load
Table 21: Output Characteristics
Parameter Min Nom Max Units Notes
Output impedance See “Output Driver Characteristics” on
page 47
Ω1, 2
Pull-up and pull-down mismatch 04Ω1, 2, 3
Output slew rate 1.5 5 V/ns 1, 4, 5, 6
Output
(V
OUT
)
Reference
point
25Ω
V
TT =
V
DD
Q/2
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 47 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Output Driver Characteristics
Output Driver Characteristics
Figure 18: Full Strength Pull-Down Characteristics
Table 22: Full Strength Pull-Down Current (mA)
Voltage (V) Min Nom Max
0.0 0.000.000.00
0.1 4.305.637.95
0.2 8.60 11.30 15.90
0.3 12.90 16.52 23.85
0.4 16.90 22.19 31.80
0.5 20.40 27.59 39.75
0.6 23.28 32.39 47.70
0.7 25.44 36.45 55.55
0.8 26.79 40.38 62.95
0.9 27.67 44.01 69.55
1.0 28.38 47.01 75.35
1.1 28.96 49.63 80.35
1.2 29.46 51.71 84.55
1.3 29.90 53.32 87.95
1.4 30.29 54.9 90.70
1.5 30.65 56.03 93.00
1.6 30.98 57.07 95.05
1.7 31.31 58.16 97.05
1.8 31.64 59.27 99.05
1.9 31.96 60.35 101.05
VOUT (V)
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
IOUT (MA)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 48 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Output Driver Characteristics
Figure 19: Full Strength Pull-Up Characteristics
Table 23: Full Strength Pull-Up Current (mA)
Voltage (V) Min Nom Max
0.0 0.000.000.00
0.1 –4.30 –5.63 7.95
0.2 –8.60 –11.30 –15.90
0.3 –12.90 –16.52 –23.85
0.4 –16.90 –22.19 –31.80
0.5 –20.40 –27.59 –39.75
0.6 –23.28 –32.39 –47.70
0.7 –25.44 –36.45 –55.55
0.8 –26.79 –40.38 –62.95
0.9 –27.67 –44.01 –69.55
1.0 –28.38 –47.01 –75.35
1.1 –28.96 –49.63 –80.35
1.2 –29.46 –51.71 –84.55
1.3 –29.90 –53.32 –87.95
1.4 –30.29 –54.90 –90.70
1.5 –30.65 –56.03 –93.00
1.6 –30.98 –57.07 –95.05
1.7 –31.31 –58.16 –97.05
1.8 –31.64 –59.27 –99.05
1.9 –31.96 –60.35 –101.05
VDDQ - VOUT (V)
0
–20
–40
60
–80
–100
–120
0 0.5 1.0 1.5
IOUT (mA)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 49 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Output Driver Characteristics
Figure 20: Reduced Strength Pull-Down Characteristics
Table 24: Reduced Strength Pull-Down Current (mA)
Voltage (V) Min Nom Max
0.0 0.000.000.00
0.1 1.722.984.77
0.2 3.445.999.54
0.3 5.16 8.75 14.31
0.4 6.76 11.76 19.08
0.5 8.16 14.62 23.85
0.6 9.31 17.17 28.62
0.7 10.18 19.32 33.33
0.8 10.72 21.40 37.77
0.9 11.07 23.32 41.73
1.0 11.35 24.92 45.21
1.1 11.58 26.30 48.21
1.2 11.78 27.41 50.73
1.3 11.96 28.26 52.77
1.4 12.12 29.10 54.42
1.5 12.26 29.70 55.80
1.6 12.39 30.25 57.03
1.7 12.52 30.82 58.23
1.8 12.66 31.41 59.43
1.9 12.78 31.98 60.63
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5
VOUT (V)
IOUT (mV)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 50 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Output Driver Characteristics
Figure 21: Reduced Strength Pull-Up Characteristics
Table 25: Reduced Strength Pull-Up Current (mA)
Voltage (V) Min Nom Max
0.0 0.000.000.00
0.1 –1.72 –2.98 4.77
0.2 –3.44 –5.99 9.54
0.3 5.16 –8.75 –14.31
0.4 –6.76 –11.76 –19.08
0.5 –8.16 –14.62 –23.85
0.6 –9.31 –17.17 –28.62
0.7 –10.18 –19.32 –33.33
0.8 –10.72 –21.40 –37.77
0.9 –11.07 –23.32 –41.73
1.0 –11.35 –24.92 –45.21
1.1 –11.58 –26.30 –48.21
1.2 –11.78 –27.41 –50.73
1.3 –11.96 –28.26 –52.77
1.4 –12.12 –29.10 –54.42
1.5 –12.26 –29.69 –55.8
1.6 –12.39 –30.25 –57.03
1.7 –12.52 –30.82 –58.23
1.8 –12.66 –31.42 –59.43
1.9 –12.78 –31.98 –60.63
0
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
60
–70
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5
VDDQ - VOUT (V)
IOUT (mV)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 51 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Power and Ground Clamp Characteristics
Power and Ground Clamp Characteristics
Power and ground clamps are provided on the following input-only balls: Address balls,
bank address balls, CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, ODT, and CKE.
Figure 22: Input Clamp Characteristics
Table 26: Input Clamp Characteristics
Voltage Across Clamp
(V)
Minimum Power Clamp
Current (mA)
Minimum Ground Clamp
Current (mA)
0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 0.0 0.0
0.2 0.0 0.0
0.3 0.0 0.0
0.4 0.0 0.0
0.5 0.0 0.0
0.6 0.0 0.0
0.7 0.0 0.0
0.8 0.1 0.1
0.9 1.0 1.0
1.0 2.5 2.5
1.1 4.7 4.7
1.2 6.8 6.8
1.3 9.1 9.1
1.4 11.0 11.0
1.5 13.5 13.5
1.6 16.0 16.0
1.7 18.2 18.2
1.8 21.0 21.0
Voltage Across Clamp (V)
Minimum Clamp Current (mA)
25
20
15
10
5
0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 52 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification
AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification
Some revisions will support the 0.9V maximum average amplitude instead of the 0.5V
maximum average amplitude shown in Tables 27 and 28.
Figure 23: Overshoot
Figure 24: Undershoot
Table 27: Address and Control Balls
Applies to address balls, bank address balls, CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, CKE, ODT
Parameter
Specification
-187E -25/-25E -3/-3E -37E -5E
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for overshoot area (see
Figure 23)
0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for undershoot area
(see Figure 24)
0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V
Maximum overshoot area above VDD (see Figure 23) 0.5 Vns 0.66 Vns 0.80 Vns 1.00 Vns 1.33 Vns
Maximum undershoot area below VSS (see Figure 24) 0.5 Vns 0.66 Vns 0.80 Vns 1.00 Vns 1.33 Vns
Table 28: Clock, Data, Strobe, and Mask Balls
Applies to DQ, DQS, DQS#, RDQS, RDQS#, UDQS, UDQS#, LDQS, LDQS#, DM, UDM, LDM
Parameter
Specification
-187E -25/-25E -3/-3E -37E -5E
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for overshoot area (see
Figure 23)
0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for undershoot area
(see Figure 24)
0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V
Maximum overshoot area above VDDQ (see Figure 23) 0.19 Vns 0.23 Vns 0.23 Vns 0.28 Vns 0.38 Vns
Maximum undershoot area below VSSQ (see Figure 24) 0.19 Vns 0.23 Vns 0.23 Vns 0.28 Vns 0.38 Vns
Maximum amplitude
Overshoot area
VDD/VDDQ
VSS/VSSQ
VOLTS (V)
Time (ns)
VSS/VSSQ
Maximum amplitude
Undershoot area
Time (ns)
Volts (V)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 53 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification
Notes: 1. All voltages referenced to VSS.
2. Input waveform setup timing (tISb) is referenced from the input signal crossing at the
VIH(AC) level for a rising signal and VIL(AC) for a falling signal applied to the device under
test, as shown in Figure 33 on page 64.
3. See “Input Slew Rate Derating” on page 54.
4. The slew rate for single-ended inputs is measured from DC level to AC level, VIL(DC) to
VIH(AC) on the rising edge and VIL(AC) to VIH(DC) on the falling edge. For signals referenced
to VREF, the valid intersection is where the “tangent” line intersects VREF, as shown in
Figures 26, 28, 30, and 32.
5. Input waveform hold (tIHb) timing is referenced from the input signal crossing at the VIL(DC)
level for a rising signal and VIH(DC) for a falling signal applied to the device under test, as
shown in Figure 33 on page 64.
6. Input waveform setup timing (tDS) and hold timing (tDH) for single-ended data strobe is
referenced from the crossing of DQS, UDQS, or LDQS through the VREF level applied to the
device under test, as shown in Figure 35 on page 65.
7. Input waveform setup timing (tDS) and hold timing (tDH) when differential data strobe is
enabled is referenced from the cross-point of DQS/DQS#, UDQS/UDQS#, or LDQS/LDQS#, as
shown in Figure 34 on page 64.
8. Input waveform timing is referenced to the crossing point level (VIX) of two input signals
(VTR and VCP) applied to the device under test, where VTR is the true input signal and VCP is
the complementary input signal, as shown in Figure 36 on page 65.
9. The slew rate for differentially ended inputs is measured from twice the DC level to twice
the AC level: 2 × VIL(DC) to 2 × VIH(AC) on the rising edge and 2 × VIL(AC) to 2 × VIH(DC) on the
falling edge. For example, the CK/CK# would be –250mV to +500mV for CK rising edge and
would be +250mV to –500mV for CK falling edge.
Table 29: AC Input Test Conditions
Parameter Symbol Min Max Units Notes
Input setup timing measurement reference level address
balls, bank address balls, CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, ODT, DM,
UDM, LDM, and CKE
VRS See Note 2 1, 2, 3,
4
Input hold timing measurement reference level address
balls, bank address balls, CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, ODT, DM,
UDM, LDM, and CKE
VRH See Note 5 1, 3, 4,
5
Input timing measurement reference level (single-ended)
DQS for x4, x8; UDQS, LDQS for x16
VREF(DC)VDDQ × 0.49 VDDQ × 0.51 V 1, 3, 4,
6
Input timing measurement reference level (differential)
CK, CK# for x4, x8, x16; DQS, DQS# for x4, x8; RDQS,
RDQS# for x8; UDQS, UDQS#, LDQS, LDQS# for x16
VRD VIX(AC) V 1, 3, 7,
8, 9
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 54 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Input Slew Rate Derating
For all input signals, the total tIS (setup time) and tIH (hold time) required is calculated
by adding the data sheet tIS (base) and tIH (base) value to the ΔtIS and ΔtIH derating
value, respectively. Example: tIS (total setup time) = tIS (base) + ΔtIS.
tIS, the nominal slew rate for a rising signal, is defined as the slew rate between the last
crossing of VREF(DC) and the first crossing of VIH(AC) MIN. Setup nominal slew rate (tIS)
for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of VREF(DC) and
the first crossing of VIL(AC) MAX.
If the actual signal is always earlier than the nominal slew rate line between shaded
“VREF(DC) to AC region,” use the nominal slew rate for the derating value (Figure 25 on
page 56).
If the actual signal is later than the nominal slew rate line anywhere between the shaded
“VREF(DC) to AC region,” the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal from the AC
level to DC level is used for the derating value (see Figure 26 on page 56).
tIH, the nominal slew rate for a rising signal, is defined as the slew rate between the last
crossing of VIL(DC) MAX and the first crossing of VREF(DC). tIH, nominal slew rate for a
falling signal, is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of VIH(DC) MIN and
the first crossing of VREF(DC).
If the actual signal is always later than the nominal slew rate line between shaded “DC to
VREF(DC) region,” use the nominal slew rate for the derating value (Figure 27 on page 57).
If the actual signal is earlier than the nominal slew rate line anywhere between shaded
“DC to VREF(DC) region,” the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal from the DC
level to VREF(DC) level is used for the derating value (Figure 28 on page 57).
Although the total setup time might be negative for slow slew rates (a valid input signal
will not have reached VIH[AC]/VIL[AC] at the time of the rising clock transition), a valid
input signal is still required to complete the transition and reach VIH(AC)/VIL(AC).
For slew rates in between the values listed in Tables 30 and 31 on page 55, the derating
values may obtained by linear interpolation.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 55 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Table 30: DDR2-400/533 Setup and Hold Time Derating Values (tIS and tIH)
Command/
Address Slew
Rate (V/ns)
CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate
Units
2.0 V/ns 1.5 V/ns 1.0 V/ns
ΔtIS ΔtIH ΔtIS ΔtIH ΔtIS ΔtIH
4.0 +187 +94 +217 +124 +247 +154 ps
3.5 +179 +89 +209 +119 +239 +149 ps
3.0 +167 +83 +197 +113 +227 +143 ps
2.5 +150 +75 +180 +105 +210 +135 ps
2.0 +125 +45 +155 +75 +185 +105 ps
1.5 +83 +21 +113 +51 +143 +81 ps
1.0 0 0 +30 +30 +60 +60 ps
0.9 –11 –14 +19 +16 +49 +46 ps
0.8 –25 –31 +5 1 +35 +29 ps
0.7 –43 –54 –13 –24 +17 +6 ps
0.6 –67 –83 –37 –53 –7 –23 ps
0.5 –110 –125 –80 –95 –50 –65 ps
0.4 –175 –188 –145 –158 –115 –128 ps
0.3 –285 –292 –255 –262 –225 –232 ps
0.25 –350 –375 –320 –345 –290 –315 ps
0.2 –525 –500 –495 –470 –465 –440 ps
0.15 –800 –708 –770 –678 –740 –648 ps
0.1 –1,450 –1,125 –1,420 –1,095 –1,390 –1,065 ps
Table 31: DDR2-667/800/1066 Setup and Hold Time Derating Values (tIS and tIH)
Command/
Address Slew
Rate (V/ns)
CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate
Units
2.0 V/ns 1.5 V/ns 1.0 V/ns
ΔtIS ΔtIH ΔtIS ΔtIH ΔtIS ΔtIH
4.0 +150 +94 +180 +124 +210 +154 ps
3.5 +143 +89 +173 +119 +203 +149 ps
3.0 +133 +83 +163 +113 +193 +143 ps
2.5 +120 +75 +150 +105 +180 +135 ps
2.0 +100 +45 +160 +75 +160 +105 ps
1.5 +67 +21 +97 +51 +127 +81 ps
1.0 0 0 +30 +30 +60 +60 ps
0.9 –5 –14 +25 +16 +55 +46 ps
0.8 –13 –31 +17 –1 +47 +29 ps
0.7 –22 –54 +8 –24 +38 +6 ps
0.6 –34 –83 –4 –53 +36 –23 ps
0.5 –60 –125 –30 –95 0 –65 ps
0.4 –100 –188 –70 –158 –40 –128 ps
0.3 –168 –292 –138 –262 –108 –232 ps
0.25 –200 –375 –170 –345 –140 –315 ps
0.2 –325 –500 –295 –470 –265 –440 ps
0.15 –517 –708 –487 –678 –457 –648 ps
0.1 –1,000 –1,125 –970 –1,095 –940 –1,065 ps
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 56 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Figure 25: Nominal Slew Rate for tIS
Figure 26: Tangent Line for tIS
V
SS
CK#
CK
tIH
tIStIH
Setup slew rate
rising signal
Setup slew rate
falling signal
DTF DTR
Δ
TF
=
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN -
V
REF
(
DC
)
Δ
TR
=
V
DD
Q
tIS
Nominal
slew rate
V
REF
to AC
region
V
REF
to AC
region
V
REF
(
DC
)
- V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
Nominal
slew rate
Setup slew rate
rising signal
ΔTF ΔTR
Tangent line (V
IH
[
AC
] MIN - V
REF
[
DC
])
ΔTR
=
Tangent
line
Tangent
line
V
REF
to AC
region
Nominal
line
tIH
tIStIH tIS
VSS
CK#
CK
VDDQ
VIH(AC) MIN
VIH(DC) MIN
VREF(DC)
VIL(DC) MAX
VIL(AC) MAX
V
REF
to AC
region
Nominal
line
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 57 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Figure 27: Nominal Slew Rate for tIH
Figure 28: Tangent Line for tIH
ΔTR ΔTF
Nominal
slew rate DC to V
REF
region
tIH
tIStIS
V
SS
CK#
CK
V
DD
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
DC to V
REF
region
Nominal
slew rate
tIH
Tangent
line DC to V
REF
region
tIH
tIStIS
V
SS
V
DD
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
DC to V
REF
region Tangent
line
tIH
CK
CK#
Hold slew rate
falling signal
ΔTF
ΔTR
Tangent line (V
IH
[
DC
] MIN - V
REF
[
DC
])
ΔTF
=
Nominal
line
Hold slew rate
rising signal
Tangent line (V
REF
[
DC
] - V
IL
[
DC
] MAX)
ΔTR
=
Nominal
line
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 58 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Notes: 1. For all input signals, the total tDS and tDH required is calculated by adding the data sheet
value to the derating value listed in Table 32.
2. tDS nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing
of VREF(DC) and the first crossing of VIH(AC) MIN. tDS nominal slew rate for a falling signal is
defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of VREF(DC) and the first crossing of
VIL(AC) MAX. If the actual signal is always earlier than the nominal slew rate line between
the shaded “VREF(DC) to AC region,” use the nominal slew rate for the derating value (see
Figure 29 on page 62). If the actual signal is later than the nominal slew rate line anywhere
between the shaded “VREF(DC) to AC region,” the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual
signal from the AC level to DC level is used for the derating value (see Figure 30 on
page 62).
3. tDH nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last cross-
ing of VIL(DC) MAX and the first crossing of VREF(DC). tDH nominal slew rate for a falling sig-
nal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of VIH(DC) MIN and the first crossing
of VREF (DC). If the actual signal is always later than the nominal slew rate line between the
shaded “DC level to VREF(DC) region,” use the nominal slew rate for the derating value (see
Figure 31 on page 63). If the actual signal is earlier than the nominal slew rate line any-
where between shaded “DC to VREF(DC) region,” the slew rate of a tangent line to the
actual signal from the DC level to VREF(DC) level is used for the derating value (see Figure 32
on page 63).
4. Although the total setup time might be negative for slow slew rates (a valid input signal
will not have reached VIH[AC]/VIL[AC] at the time of the rising clock transition), a valid input
signal is still required to complete the transition and reach VIH(AC)/VIL(AC).
5. For slew rates between the values listed in this table, the derating values may be obtained
by linear interpolation.
6. These values are typically not subject to production test. They are verified by design and
characterization.
7. Single-ended DQS requires special derating. The values in Table 34 on page 60 are the DQS
single-ended slew rate derating with DQS referenced at VREF and DQ referenced at the logic
levels tDSb and tDHb. Converting the derated base values from DQs referenced to the AC/DC
trip points to DQs referenced to VREF is listed in Table 36 on page 61 and Table 37 on
page 61. Table 36 on page 61 provides the VREF-based fully derated values for the DQ (tDSa
and tDHa) for DDR2-533. Table 37 on page 61 provides the VREF-based fully derated values
for the DQ (tDSa and tDHa) for DDR2-400.
Table 32: DDR2-400/DDR2-533 tDS, tDH Derating Values with Differential Strobe
All units are shown in picoseconds
DQ
Slew
Rate
(V/ns)
DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate
4.0 V/ns 3.0 V/ns 2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns 1.6 V/ns 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns 1.0 V/ns 0.8 V/ns
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
2.0125451254512545––––––––––––
1.5 8321832183219533
1.0 00000012122424––––––––
0.9 –11 –14 –11 –14 1 –2 13 10 25 22
0.8 –25 –31 –13 –19 1 –7 11 5 23 17
0.7 –31 –42 –19 –30 –7 –18 5 –6 17 6
0.6 –43 –59 –31 –47 –19 –35 –7 –23 5 –11
0.5 –74 –89 –62 –77 –50 –65 –38 –53
0.4 –127 –140 –115 –128 –103 –116
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 59 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Notes: 1. For all input signals the total tDS and tDH required is calculated by adding the data sheet
value to the derating value listed in Table 33.
2. tDS nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing
of VREF(DC) and the first crossing of VIH(AC) MIN. tDS nominal slew rate for a falling signal is
defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of VREF(DC) and the first crossing of
VIL(AC) MAX. If the actual signal is always earlier than the nominal slew rate line between
the shaded “VREF(DC) to AC region,” use the nominal slew rate for the derating value (see
Figure 29 on page 62). If the actual signal is later than the nominal slew rate line anywhere
between shaded “VREF(DC) to AC region,” the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal
from the AC level to DC level is used for the derating value (see Figure 30 on page 62).
3. tDH nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last cross-
ing of VIL(DC) MAX and the first crossing of VREF(DC). tDH nominal slew rate for a falling sig-
nal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of VIH(DC) MIN and the first crossing
of VREF(DC). If the actual signal is always later than the nominal slew rate line between the
shaded “DC level to VREF(DC) region,” use the nominal slew rate for the derating value (see
Figure 31 on page 63). If the actual signal is earlier than the nominal slew rate line any-
where between the shaded “DC to VREF(DC) region,” the slew rate of a tangent line to the
actual signal from the DC level to VREF(DC) level is used for the derating value (see Figure 32
on page 63).
4. Although the total setup time might be negative for slow slew rates (a valid input signal
will not have reached VIH[AC]/VIL[AC] at the time of the rising clock transition), a valid input
signal is still required to complete the transition and reach VIH(AC)/VIL(AC).
5. For slew rates between the values listed in this table, the derating values may be obtained
by linear interpolation.
6. These values are typically not subject to production test. They are verified by design and
characterization.
7. Single-ended DQS requires special derating. The values in Table 34 on page 60 are the DQS
single-ended slew rate derating with DQS referenced at VREF and DQ referenced at the logic
levels tDSb and tDHb. Converting the derated base values from DQs referenced to the AC/DC
trip points to DQs referenced to VREF is listed in Table 35 on page 60. Table 35 on page 60
provides the VREF-based fully derated values for the DQ (tDSa and tDHa) for DDR2-667. It is
not advised to operate DDR2-800 and DDR2-1066 devices with single-ended DQS; however
Table 34 on page 60 would be used with the base values.
Table 33: DDR2-667/DDR2-800/DDR2-1066 tDS, tDH Derating Values with Differential Strobe
All units are shown in picoseconds
DQ
Slew
Rate
(V/ns)
DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate
2.8 V/ns 2.4 V/ns 2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns 1.6 V/ns 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns 1.0 V/ns 0.8 V/ns
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
Δ
tDH
2.0 100 63 100 63 100 63 112 75 124 87 136 99 148 111 160 123 172 135
1.5 67 42 67 42 67 42 79 54 91 66 103 78 115 90 127 102 139 114
1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 121224243636484860607272
0.9 5145145147 219103122433455466758
0.8 –13 –31 –13 –31 –13 –31 –1 –19 11 –7 23 5 35 17 47 29 59 41
0.7 –22 –54 –22 –54 –22 –54 –10 –42 2 –30 14 –18 26 –6 38 6 50 18
0.6 –34 –83 –34 –83 –34 –83 –22 –71 –10 –59 2 –47 14 –35 26 –23 38 –11
0.5 –60 –125 –60 –125 –60 –125 –48 –113 –36 –101 –24 –89 –12 –77 0 –65 12 –53
0.4 –100 –188 –100 –188 –100 –188 –88 –176 –76 –164 –64 –152 –52 –140 –40 –128 –28 –116
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 60 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Table 34: Single-Ended DQS Slew Rate Derating Values Using tDSb and tDHb
Reference points indicated in bold; Derating values are to be used with base tDSb- and tDHb-specified values
DQ
(V/ns)
DQS Single-Ended Slew Rate Derated (at VREF)
2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns 1.6 V/ns 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns 1.0 V/ns 0.8 V/ns 0.6 V/ns 0.4V/ns
tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH
2.0 130 53 130 53 130 53 130 53 130 53 145 48 155 45 165 41 175 38
1.5 97 32 97 32 97 32 97 32 97 32 112 27 122 24 132 20 142 17
1.0 30 –10 30 –10 30 –10 30 –10 30 –10 45 –15 55 –18 65 –22 75 –25
0.9 25 –24 25 –24 25 –24 25 –24 25 –24 40 –29 50 –32 60 –36 70 –39
0.8 17 –41 17 –41 17 –41 17 –41 17 –41 32 –46 42 –49 52 –53 61 –56
0.7 5 –64 5 –64 5 –64 5 –64 5 –64 20 –69 30 –72 40 –75 50 –79
0.6 –7 –93 –7 –93 –7 –93 –7 –93 –7 –93 8 –98 18 –102 28 –105 38 –108
0.5 –28 –135 –28 –135 –28 135 –28 –135 –28 –135 –13 –140 –3 –143 7 –147 17 –150
0.4 –78 –198 –78 –198 –78 198 –78 –198 –78 –198 –63 –203 –53 –206 –43 –210 –33 –213
Table 35: Single-Ended DQS Slew Rate Fully Derated (DQS, DQ at VREF) at DDR2-667
Reference points indicated in bold
DQ
(V/ns)
DQS Single-Ended Slew Rate Derated (at VREF)
2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns 1.6 V/ns 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns 1.0 V/ns 0.8 V/ns 0.6 V/ns 0.4V/ns
tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH
2.0 330 291 330 291 330 291 330 291 330 291 345 286 355 282 365 29 375 276
1.5 330 290 330 290 330 290 330 290 330 290 345 285 355 282 365 279 375 275
1.0 330 290 330 290 330 290 330 290 330 290 345 285 355 282 365 278 375 275
0.9 347 290 347 290 347 290 347 290 347 290 362 285 372 282 382 278 392 275
0.8 367 290 367 290 367 290 367 290 367 290 382 285 392 282 402 278 412 275
0.7 391 290 391 290 391 290 391 290 391 290 406 285 416 281 426 278 436 275
0.6 426 290 426 290 426 290 426 290 426 290 441 285 451 282 461 278 471 275
0.5 472 290 472 290 472 290 472 290 472 290 487 285 497 282 507 278 517 275
0.4 522 289 522 289 522 289 522 289 522 289 537 284 547 281 557 278 567 274
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 61 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Table 36: Single-Ended DQS Slew Rate Fully Derated (DQS, DQ at VREF) at DDR2-533
Reference points indicated in bold
DQ
(V/ns)
DQS Single-Ended Slew Rate Derated (at VREF)
2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns 1.6 V/ns 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns 1.0 V/ns 0.8 V/ns 0.6 V/ns 0.4V/ns
tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH
2.0 355 341 355 341 355 341 355 341 355 341 370 336 380 332 390 329 400 326
1.5 364 340 364 340 364 340 364 340 364 340 379 335 389 332 399 329 409 325
1.0 380 340 380 340 380 340 380 340 380 340 395 335 405 332 415 328 425 325
0.9 402 340 402 340 402 340 402 340 402 340 417 335 427 332 437 328 447 325
0.8 429 340 429 340 429 340 429 340 429 340 444 335 454 332 464 328 474 325
0.7 463 340 463 340 463 340 463 340 463 340 478 335 488 331 498 328 508 325
0.6 510 340 510 340 510 340 510 340 510 340 525 335 535 332 545 328 555 325
0.5 572 340 572 340 572 340 572 340 572 340 587 335 597 332 607 328 617 325
0.4 647 339 647 339 647 339 647 339 647 339 662 334 672 331 682 328 692 324
Table 37: Single-Ended DQS Slew Rate Fully Derated (DQS, DQ at VREF) at DDR2-400
Reference points indicated in bold
DQ
(V/ns)
DQS Single-Ended Slew Rate Derated (at VREF)
2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns 1.6 V/ns 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns 1.0 V/ns 0.8 V/ns 0.6 V/ns 0.4V/ns
tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH
2.0 405 391 405 391 405 391 405 391 405 391 420 386 430 382 440 379 450 376
1.5 414 390 414 390 414 390 414 390 414 390 429 385 439 382 449 379 459 375
1.0 430 390 430 390 430 390 430 390 430 390 445 385 455 382 465 378 475 375
0.9 452 390 452 390 452 390 452 390 452 390 467 385 477 382 487 378 497 375
0.8 479 390 479 390 479 390 479 390 479 390 494 385 504 382 514 378 524 375
0.7 513 390 513 390 513 390 513 390 513 390 528 385 538 381 548 378 558 375
0.6 560 390 560 390 560 390 560 390 560 390 575 385 585 382 595 378 605 375
0.5 622 390 622 390 622 390 622 390 622 390 637 385 647 382 657 378 667 375
0.4 697 389 697 389 697 389 697 389 697 389 712 384 722 381 732 378 742 374
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 62 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Figure 29: Nominal Slew Rate for tDS
Notes: 1. DQS, DQS# signals must be monotonic between VIL(DC) MAX and VIH(DC) MIN.
Figure 30: Tangent Line for tDS
Notes: 1. DQS, DQS# signals must be monotonic between VIL(DC) MAX and VIH(DC) MIN.
V
REF
to AC
region
V
REF
to AC
region
Setup slew rate
rising signal
Setup slew rate
falling signal
Δ
TF
Δ
TR
V
REF
(
DC
)
- V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
ΔTF
=
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN -
V
REF
(
DC
)
ΔTR
=
Nominal
slew rate
V
SS
DQS#1
DQS1
V
DD
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
tDH
tDS
Nominal
slew rate
tDH
tDS
Δ
TF
Δ
TR
Setup slew rate
rising signal
Setup slew rate
falling signal
Tangent line (V
REF
[
DC
] - V
IL
[
AC
] MAX)
ΔTF
=Tangent line (V
IH
[
AC
] MIN - V
REF
[
DC
])
ΔTR
=
tDH
tDS
tDH
tDS
V
SS
DQS#1
DQS1
V
DD
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
Nominal line
Tangent line
Nominal
line
Tangent line
V
REF
to AC
region
V
REF
to AC
region
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 63 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Figure 31: Nominal Slew Rate for tDH
Notes: 1. DQS, DQS# signals must be monotonic between VIL(DC) MAX and VIH(DC) MIN.
Figure 32: Tangent Line for tDH
Notes: 1. DQS, DQS# signals must be monotonic between VIL(DC) MAX and VIH(DC) MIN.
Hold slew rate
falling signal
Hold slew rate
rising signal
V
REF
(
DC
) -
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
Δ
TR
=
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN -
V
REF
(
DC
)
Δ
TF
=
ΔTR ΔTF
Nominal
slew rate DC to V
REF
region
tIH
tIStIS
V
SS
DQS#1
DQS1
V
DD
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
DC to V
REF
region
Nominal
slew rate
tIH
Tangent
line DC to V
REF
region
tIH
tIStIS
V
SS
V
DD
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
DC to V
REF
region Tangent
line
tIH
DQS1
DQS#1
Hold slew rate
falling signal
ΔTF
ΔTR
Tangent line (V
IH
[
DC
] MIN - V
REF
[
DC
])
ΔTF
=
Nominal
line
Hold slew rate
rising signal
Tangent line (V
REF
[
DC
] - V
IL
[
DC
] MAX)
ΔTR
=
Nominal
line
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 64 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Figure 33: AC Input Test Signal Waveform Command/Address Balls
Figure 34: AC Input Test Signal Waveform for Data with DQS, DQS# (Differential)
tISa
Logic levels
VREF levels
tIHatISatIHa
tISbtIHbtISbtIHb
CK#
CK
VDDQ
VIH(AC) MIN
VIH(DC) MIN
VREF(DC)
VIL(DC) MIN
VIL(AC) MIN
VSSQ
VSWING (MAX)
DQS#
DQS
tDSatDHatDSatDHa
tDSbtDHbtDSbtDHb
Logic levels
V
REF
levels
V
REF
(
DC
)
V
IL
(
DC
) MAX
V
IL
(
AC
) MAX
V
SS
Q
V
IH
(
DC
) MIN
V
IH
(
AC
) MIN
V
DD
Q
V
SWING
(MAX)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 65 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Input Slew Rate Derating
Figure 35: AC Input Test Signal Waveform for Data with DQS (Single-Ended)
Figure 36: AC Input Test Signal Waveform (Differential)
DQS
VREF
VREF(DC)
VIL(DC) MAX
VIL(AC) MAX
VSSQ
VIH(DC) MIN
VIH(AC) MIN
VDDQ
VSWING (MAX)
Logic levels
VREF levels
tDSatDHatDSatDHa
tDSbtDHbtDSbtDHb
VTR
VSWING
VCP
VDDQ
VSSQ
VIX
Crossing point
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 66 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
Commands
Truth Tables
The following tables provide a quick reference of available DDR2 SDRAM commands,
including CKE power-down modes and bank-to-bank commands.
Notes: 1. All DDR2 SDRAM commands are defined by states of CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, and CKE at the
rising edge of the clock.
2. The state of ODT does not affect the states described in this table. The ODT function is not
available during self refresh. See “ODT Timing” on page 120 for details.
3. “X” means “H or L” (but a defined logic level) for valid IDD measurements.
4. BA2 is only applicable for densities >1Gb.
5. An is the most significant address bit for a given density and configuration. Some larger
address bits may be “Don’t Care” during column addressing, depending on density and con-
figuration.
6. Bank addresses (BA) determine which bank is to be operated upon. BA during a LOAD
MODE command selects which mode register is programmed.
7. SELF REFRESH exit is asynchronous.
8. Burst reads or writes at BL = 4 cannot be terminated or interrupted. See Figure 50 on
page 90 and Figure 62 on page 101 for other restrictions and details.
9. The power-down mode does not perform any REFRESH operations. The duration of power-
down is limited by the refresh requirements outlined in the AC parametric section.
Table 38: Truth Table – DDR2 Commands
Notes: 1–3 apply to the entire table
Function
CKE
CS# RAS# CAS# WE#
BA2–
BA0 An–A11 A10 A9–A0 Notes
Previous
Cycle
Current
Cycle
LOAD MODE H H L L L L BA OP code 4, 6
REFRESH HHLLLHXXXX
SELF REFRESH entry HLLLLHXXXX
SELF REFRESH exit LHHXXXXXXX4, 7
LHHH
Single bank PRECHARGE HHLLHLBAXLX6
All banks PRECHARGE HHLLHLXXHX
Bank activate H H L L H H BA Row address 4
WRITE HHLHLLBAColumn
address
L Column
address
4, 5, 6, 8
WRITE with auto
precharge
HHLHLLBAColumn
address
H Column
address
4, 5, 6, 8
READ HHLHLHBAColumn
address
L Column
address
4, 5, 6, 8
READ with auto
precharge
HHLHLHBAColumn
address
H Column
address
4, 5, 6, 8
NO OPERATION HXLHHHXXXX
Device DESELECT HXHXXXXXXX
Power-down entry HLHXXXXXXX 9
LHHH
Power-down exit LHHXXXXXXX9
LHHH
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 67 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
Notes: 1. This table applies when CKEn - 1 was HIGH and CKEn is HIGH and after tXSNR has been met
(if the previous state was self refresh).
2. This table is bank-specific, except where noted (the current state is for a specific bank and
the commands shown are those allowed to be issued to that bank when in that state).
Exceptions are covered in the notes below.
3. Current state definitions:
4. The following states must not be interrupted by a command issued to the same bank. Issue
DESELECT or NOP commands, or allowable commands to the other bank, on any clock edge
occurring during these states. Allowable commands to the other bank are determined by its
current state and this table, and according to Table 40 on page 69.
Table 39: Truth Table – Current State Bank n – Command to Bank n
Notes: 1–6 apply to the entire table
Current
State CS# RAS# CAS# WE# Command/Action Notes
Any HXXX
DESELECT (NOP/continue previous operation)
LHHH
NO OPERATION (NOP/continue previous
operation)
Idle LLHH
ACTIVATE (select and activate row)
LLLH
REFRESH 7
LLLL
LOAD MODE 7
Row active LHLH
READ (select column and start READ burst) 8
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start WRITE burst) 8
LLHL
PRECHARGE (deactivate row in bank or banks) 9
Read (auto-
precharge
disabled)
LHLH
READ (select column and start new READ burst) 8
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start WRITE burst) 8, 10
LLHL
PRECHARGE (start PRECHARGE) 8
Write (auto-
precharge
disabled)
LHLH
READ (select column and start READ burst) 8
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start new WRITE burst) 8
LLHL
PRECHARGE (start PRECHARGE) 9
Idle: The bank has been precharged, tRP has been met, and any READ burst
is complete.
Row active: A row in the bank has been activated, and tRCD has been met. No
data bursts/accesses and no register accesses are in progress.
Read: A READ burst has been initiated, with auto precharge disabled and
has not yet terminated.
Write: A WRITE burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and
has not yet terminated.
Precharge: Starts with registration of a PRECHARGE command and ends when tRP
is met. After tRP is met, the bank will be in the idle state.
Read with auto
precharge enabled:
Starts with registration of a READ command with auto precharge
enabled and ends when tRP has been met. After tRP is met, the bank
will be in the idle state.
Row activate: Starts with registration of an ACTIVATE command and ends when
tRCD is met. After tRCD is met, the bank will be in the row active state.
Write with auto
precharge
enabled:
Starts with registration of a WRITE command with auto precharge
enabled and ends when tRP has been met. After tRP is met, the bank
will be in the idle state.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 68 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
5. The following states must not be interrupted by any executable command (DESELECT or
NOP commands must be applied on each positive clock edge during these states):
6. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved.
7. Not bank-specific; requires that all banks are idle and bursts are not in progress.
8. READs or WRITEs listed in the Command/Action column include READs or WRITEs with auto
precharge enabled and READs or WRITEs with auto precharge disabled.
9. May or may not be bank-specific; if multiple banks are to be precharged, each must be in a
valid state for precharging.
10. A WRITE command may be applied after the completion of the READ burst.
Refresh: Starts with registration of a REFRESH command and ends when tRFC is
met. After tRFC is met, the DDR2 SDRAM will be in the all banks idle
state.
Accessing mode
register:
Starts with registration of the LOAD MODE command and ends when
tMRD has been met. After tMRD is met, the DDR2 SDRAM will be in
the all banks idle state.
Precharge all: Starts with registration of a PRECHARGE ALL command and ends
when tRP is met. After tRP is met, all banks will be in the idle state.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 69 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
Notes: 1. This table applies when CKEn - 1 was HIGH and CKEn is HIGH and after tXSNR has been met
(if the previous state was self refresh).
2. This table describes an alternate bank operation, except where noted (the current state is
for bank n and the commands shown are those allowed to be issued to bank m, assuming
that bank m is in such a state that the given command is allowable). Exceptions are covered
in the notes below.
3. Current state definitions:
Table 40: Truth Table – Current State Bank n – Command to Bank m
Notes: 1–6 apply to the entire table
Current State CS# RAS# CAS# WE# Command/Action Notes
Any HXXX
DESELECT (NOP/continue previous operation)
LHHH
NO OPERATION (NOP/continue previous operation)
Idle XXXX
Any command otherwise allowed to bank m
Row active, active,
or precharge
LLHH
ACTIVATE (select and activate row)
LHLH
READ (select column and start READ burst) 7
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start WRITE burst) 7
LLHL
PRECHARGE
Read (auto
precharge
disabled)
LLHH
ACTIVATE (select and activate row)
LHLH
READ (select column and start new READ burst) 7
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start WRITE burst) 7, 8
LLHL
PRECHARGE
Write (auto
precharge
disabled)
LLHH
ACTIVATE (select and activate row)
LHLH
READ (select column and start READ burst) 7, 9, 10
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start new WRITE burst) 7
LLHL
PRECHARGE
Read (with auto-
precharge)
LLHH
ACTIVATE (select and activate row)
LHLH
READ (select column and start new READ burst 7
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start WRITE burst) 7, 8
LLHL
PRECHARGE
Write (with auto-
precharge)
LLHH
ACTIVATE (select and activate row)
LHLH
READ (select column and start READ burst) 7, 10
LHLL
WRITE (select column and start new WRITE burst) 7
LLHL
PRECHARGE
Idle: The bank has been precharged, tRP has been met, and any READ burst is
complete.
Row active: A row in the bank has been activated and tRCD has been met. No data bursts/
accesses and no register accesses are in progress.
Read: A READ burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and has not
yet terminated.
Write: A WRITE burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and has not
yet terminated.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 70 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
The minimum delay from a READ or WRITE command with auto precharge enabled to a
command to a different bank is summarized in Table 41:
4. REFRESH and LOAD MODE commands may only be issued when all banks are idle.
5. Not used.
6. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved.
7. READs or WRITEs listed in the Command/Action column include READs or WRITEs with auto
precharge enabled and READs or WRITEs with auto precharge disabled.
8. A WRITE command may be applied after the completion of the READ burst.
9. Requires appropriate DM.
10. The number of clock cycles required to meet tWTR is either two or tWTR/tCK, whichever is
greater.
DESELECT
The DESELECT function (CS# HIGH) prevents new commands from being executed by
the DDR2 SDRAM. The DDR2 SDRAM is effectively deselected. Operations already in
progress are not affected. DESELECT is also referred to as COMMAND INHIBIT.
NO OPERATION (NOP)
The NO OPERATION (NOP) command is used to instruct the selected DDR2 SDRAM to
perform a NOP (CS# is LOW; RAS#, CAS#, and WE are HIGH). This prevents unwanted
commands from being registered during idle or wait states. Operations already in
progress are not affected.
READ with
auto
precharge
enabled/
WRITE with
auto
precharge
enabled:
The READ with auto precharge enabled or WRITE with auto precharge
enabled states can each be broken into two parts: the access period and the
precharge period. For READ with auto precharge, the precharge period is
defined as if the same burst was executed with auto precharge disabled and
then followed with the earliest possible PRECHARGE command that still
accesses all of the data in the burst. For WRITE with auto precharge, the
precharge period begins when tWR ends, with tWR measured as if auto
precharge was disabled. The access period starts with registration of the
command and ends where the precharge period (or tRP) begins. This device
supports concurrent auto precharge such that when a READ with auto
precharge is enabled or a WRITE with auto precharge is enabled, any
command to other banks is allowed, as long as that command does not
interrupt the read or write data transfer already in process. In either case, all
other related limitations apply (contention between read data and write
data must be avoided).
Table 41: Minimum Delay with Auto Precharge Enabled
From Command
(Bank n)To Command (Bank m)
Minimum Delay
(with Concurrent
Auto Precharge) Units
WRITE with auto
precharge
READ or READ with auto
precharge
(CL - 1) + (BL/2) + tWTR tCK
WRITE or WRITE with auto
precharge
(BL/2) tCK
PRECHARGE or ACTIVATE 1 tCK
READ with auto
precharge
READ or READ with auto
precharge
(BL/2) tCK
WRITE or WRITE with auto
precharge
(BL/2) + 2 tCK
PRECHARGE or ACTIVATE 1 tCK
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 71 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
LOAD MODE (LM)
The mode registers are loaded via bank address and address inputs. The bank address
balls determine which mode register will be programmed. See “Mode Register (MR)” on
page 76. The LM command can only be issued when all banks are idle, and a subsequent
executable command cannot be issued until tMRD is met.
ACTIVATE
The ACTIVATE command is used to open (or activate) a row in a particular bank for a
subsequent access. The value on the bank address inputs determines the bank, and the
address inputs select the row. This row remains active (or open) for accesses until a
PRECHARGE command is issued to that bank. A PRECHARGE command must be issued
before opening a different row in the same bank.
READ
The READ command is used to initiate a burst read access to an active row. The value on
the bank address inputs determine the bank, and the address provided on address
inputs A0–Ai (where Ai is the most significant column address bit for a given configura-
tion) selects the starting column location. The value on input A10 determines whether
or not auto precharge is used. If auto precharge is selected, the row being accessed will
be precharged at the end of the READ burst; if auto precharge is not selected, the row will
remain open for subsequent accesses.
DDR2 SDRAM also supports the AL feature, which allows a READ or WRITE command to
be issued prior to tRCD (MIN) by delaying the actual registration of the READ/WRITE
command to the internal device by AL clock cycles.
WRITE
The WRITE command is used to initiate a burst write access to an active row. The value
on the bank select inputs selects the bank, and the address provided on inputs A0–Ai
(where Ai is the most significant column address bit for a given configuration) selects the
starting column location. The value on input A10 determines whether or not auto
precharge is used. If auto precharge is selected, the row being accessed will be
precharged at the end of the WRITE burst; if auto precharge is not selected, the row will
remain open for subsequent accesses.
DDR2 SDRAM also supports the AL feature, which allows a READ or WRITE command to
be issued prior to tRCD (MIN) by delaying the actual registration of the READ/WRITE
command to the internal device by AL clock cycles.
Input data appearing on the DQ is written to the memory array subject to the DM input
logic level appearing coincident with the data. If a given DM signal is registered LOW, the
corresponding data will be written to memory; if the DM signal is registered HIGH, the
corresponding data inputs will be ignored, and a WRITE will not be executed to that
byte/column location (see Figure 67 on page 106).
PRECHARGE
The PRECHARGE command is used to deactivate the open row in a particular bank or
the open row in all banks. The bank(s) will be available for a subsequent row activation a
specified time (tRP) after the PRECHARGE command is issued, except in the case of
concurrent auto precharge, where a READ or WRITE command to a different bank is
allowed as long as it does not interrupt the data transfer in the current bank and does
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 72 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Commands
not violate any other timing parameters. After a bank has been precharged, it is in the
idle state and must be activated prior to any READ or WRITE commands being issued to
that bank. A PRECHARGE command is allowed if there is no open row in that bank (idle
state) or if the previously open row is already in the process of precharging. However, the
precharge period will be determined by the last PRECHARGE command issued to the
bank.
REFRESH
REFRESH is used during normal operation of the DDR2 SDRAM and is analogous to
CAS#-before-RAS# (CBR) REFRESH. All banks must be in the idle mode prior to issuing a
REFRESH command. This command is nonpersistent, so it must be issued each time a
refresh is required. The addressing is generated by the internal refresh controller. This
makes the address bits a “Dont Care” during a REFRESH command.
SELF REFRESH
The SELF REFRESH command can be used to retain data in the DDR2 SDRAM, even if
the rest of the system is powered down. When in the self refresh mode, the DDR2
SDRAM retains data without external clocking. All power supply inputs (including VREF )
must be maintained at valid levels upon entry/exit and during SELF REFRESH opera-
tion.
The SELF REFRESH command is initiated like a REFRESH command except CKE is LOW.
The DLL is automatically disabled upon entering self refresh and is automatically
enabled upon exiting self refresh.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 73 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Operations
Initialization
DDR2 SDRAMs must be powered up and initialized in a predefined manner. Operational
procedures other than those specified may result in undefined operation. Figure 37 illus-
trates and the notes outline the sequence of progression required for power-up and
initialization.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 74 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 37: DDR2 Power-Up and Initialization
Notes: 1.
Applying power; if CKE is maintained below 0.2 × V
DD
Q,
outputs remain disabled. To guarantee RTT (ODT resistance) is off,
VREF must be valid and a low level must be applied to the ODT ball (all other inputs may be undefined; I/Os and outputs
must be less than VDDQ during voltage ramp time to avoid DDR2 SDRAM device latch-up). VTT is not applied directly to
the device; however, tVTD should be 0 to avoid device latch-up. At least one of the following two sets of conditions (A
or B) must be met to obtain a stable supply state (stable supply defined as VDD, VDDL, VDDQ, VREF, and VTT are between
their minimum and maximum values as stated in Table 14 on page 41):
t
VTD1
CKE
R
TT
Power-up:
VDD and stable
clock (CK, CK#)
T = 200µs (MIN)3
High-Z
DM15
DQS15 High-Z
Address16
CK
CK#
tCL
VTT1
VREF
VDDQ
Command
NOP3
PRE
T0 Ta0
Dont care
tCL
tCK
VDD
ODT
DQ15 High-Z
Tb0
200 cycles of CK are required before a READ command can be issued
MR with
DLL RESET
tRFC
LM8PRE9
LM7REF10 REF10 LM11
Tg0 Th0 Ti0 Tj0
MR without
DLL RESET
EMR with
OCD default
Tk0 Tl0 Tm0
Te0 Tf0
EMR(2) EMR(3)
tMRD
LM6
LM5
A10 = 1
tRPA
Tc0Td0
SSTL_18
low level2
Valid14
Valid
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
LM12
EMR with
OCD exit
LM13
Normal
operation
See note 10
CodeCode
A10 = 1
CodeCode
CodeCodeCode
tMRD tMRD tMRD tMRD
tRPA tRFC
VDDL
tMRD tMRD
EMR
T = 400ns (MIN)4
LVCMOS
low level2
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 75 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
A. Single power source: The VDD voltage ramp from 300mV to VDD (MIN) must take no
longer than 200ms; during the VDD voltage ramp, |VDD - VDDQ| 0.3V. Once supply volt-
age ramping is complete (when VDDQ crosses VDD [MIN]), Table 14 on page 41 specifica-
tions apply.
• VDD, VDDL, and VDDQ are driven from a single power converter output
• VTT is limited to 0.95V MAX
• VREF tracks VDDQ/2; VREF must be within ±0.3V with respect to VDDQ/2 during sup-
ply ramp time
• VDDQ VREF at all times
B. Multiple power sources: VDD VDDLVDDQ must be maintained during supply voltage
ramping, for both AC and DC levels, until supply voltage ramping completes (VDDQ
crosses VDD [MIN]). Once supply voltage ramping is complete, Table 14 on page 41 speci-
fications apply.
• Apply VDD and VDDL before or at the same time as VDDQ; VDD/VDDL voltage ramp
time must be 200ms from when VDD ramps from 300mV to VDD (MIN)
• Apply VDDQ before or at the same time as VTT; the VDDQ voltage ramp time from
when VDD (MIN) is achieved to when VDDQ (MIN) is achieved must be 500ms; while
VDD is ramping, current can be supplied from VDD through the device to VDDQ
• VREF must track VDDQ/2; VREF must be within ±0.3V with respect to VDDQ/2 during
supply ramp time; VDDQ VREF must be met at all times
• Apply VTT; the VTT voltage ramp time from when VDDQ (MIN) is achieved to when
VTT (MIN) is achieved must be no greater than 500ms
2. CKE requires LVCMOS input levels prior to state T0 to ensure DQs are High-Z during device
power-up prior to VREF being stable. After state T0, CKE is required to have SSTL_18 input
levels. Once CKE transitions to a high level, it must stay HIGH for the duration of the initial-
ization sequence.
3. For a minimum of 200µs after stable power and clock (CK, CK#), apply NOP or DESELECT
commands, then take CKE HIGH.
4. Wait a minimum of 400ns then issue a PRECHARGE ALL command.
5. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the EMR(2). To issue an EMR(2) command, provide LOW to
BA0, and provide HIGH to BA1; set register E7 to “0” or “1” to select appropriate self
refresh rate; remaining EMR(2) bits must be “0” (see "Extended Mode Register 2 (EMR2)"
on page 84 for all EMR(2) requirements).
6. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the EMR(3). To issue an EMR(3) command, provide HIGH
to BA0 and BA1; remaining EMR(3) bits must be “0.” See “Extended Mode Register 3 (EMR
3)” on page 85 for all EMR(3) requirements.
7. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the EMR to enable DLL. To issue a DLL ENABLE command,
provide LOW to BA1 and A0; provide HIGH to BA0; bits E7, E8, and E9 can be set to “0” or
“1;” Micron recommends setting them to “0;” remaining EMR bits must be “0.” See
“Extended Mode Register (EMR)” on page 80 for all EMR requirements.
8. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the MR for DLL RESET. 200 cycles of clock input is required
to lock the DLL. To issue a DLL RESET, provide HIGH to A8 and provide LOW to BA1 and BA0;
CKE must be HIGH the entire time the DLL is resetting; remaining MR bits must be “0.” See
“Mode Register (MR)” on page 76 for all MR requirements.
9. Issue PRECHARGE ALL command.
10. Issue two or more REFRESH commands.
11. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the MR with LOW to A8 to initialize device operation
(that is, to program operating parameters without resetting the DLL). To access the MR, set
BA0 and BA1 LOW; remaining MR bits must be set to desired settings. See “Mode Register
(MR)” on page 76 for all MR requirements.
12. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the EMR to enable OCD default by setting bits E7, E8, and
E9 to “1,” and then setting all other desired parameters. To access the EMR, set BA0 LOW
and BA1 HIGH (see "Extended Mode Register (EMR)" on page 80 for all EMR requirements.
13. Issue a LOAD MODE command to the EMR to enable OCD exit by setting bits E7, E8, and E9
to “0,” and then setting all other desired parameters. To access the extended mode regis-
ters, EMR, set BA0 LOW and BA1 HIGH for all EMR requirements.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 76 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
14. The DDR2 SDRAM is now initialized and ready for normal operation 200 clock cycles after
the DLL RESET at Tf0.
15. DM represents DM for the x4, x8 configurations and UDM, LDM for the x16 configuration;
DQS represents DQS, DQS#, UDQS, UDQS#, LDQS, LDQS#, RDQS, RDQS# for the appropriate
configuration (x4, x8, x16); DQ represents DQ0–DQ3 for x4, DQ–DQ7 for x8 and DQ0–DQ15
for x16.
16. A10 = PRECHARGE ALL, CODE = desired values for mode registers (bank addresses are
required to be decoded).
Mode Register (MR)
The mode register is used to define the specific mode of operation of the DDR2 SDRAM.
This definition includes the selection of a burst length, burst type, CAS latency, oper-
ating mode, DLL RESET, write recovery, and power-down mode, as shown in Figure 38
on page 77. Contents of the mode register can be altered by reexecuting the LOAD
MODE (LM) command. If the user chooses to modify only a subset of the MR variables,
all variables must be programmed when the command is issued.
The MR is programmed via the LM command and will retain the stored information
until it is programmed again or until the device loses power (except for bit M8, which is
self-clearing). Reprogramming the mode register will not alter the contents of the
memory array, provided it is performed correctly.
The LM command can only be issued (or reissued) when all banks are in the precharged
state (idle state) and no bursts are in progress. The controller must wait the specified
time tMRD before initiating any subsequent operations such as an ACTIVATE command.
Violating either of these requirements will result in an unspecified operation.
Burst Length
Burst length is defined by bits M0–M2, as shown in Figure 38 on page 77. Read and write
accesses to the DDR2 SDRAM are burst-oriented, with the burst length being program-
mable to either four or eight. The burst length determines the maximum number of
column locations that can be accessed for a given READ or WRITE command.
When a READ or WRITE command is issued, a block of columns equal to the burst
length is effectively selected. All accesses for that burst take place within this block,
meaning that the burst will wrap within the block if a boundary is reached. The block is
uniquely selected by A2–Ai when BL = 4 and by A3–Ai when BL = 8 (where Ai is the most
significant column address bit for a given configuration). The remaining (least signifi-
cant) address bit(s) is (are) used to select the starting location within the block. The
programmed burst length applies to both READ and WRITE bursts.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 77 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 38: Mode Register (MR) Definition
Notes: 1. M16 (BA2) is only applicable for densities >1Gb, reserved for future use, and must be pro-
grammed to “0.”
2. Mode bits (Mn) with corresponding address balls (An) greater than M12 (A12) are reserved
for future use and must be programmed to “0.”
3. Not all listed WR and CL options are supported in any individual speed grade.
Burst Type
Accesses within a given burst may be programmed to be either sequential or interleaved.
The burst type is selected via bit M3, as shown in Figure 38. The ordering of accesses
within a burst is determined by the burst length, the burst type, and the starting column
address, as shown in Table 42 on page 78. DDR2 SDRAM supports 4-bit burst mode and
8-bit burst mode only. For 8-bit burst mode, full interleaved address ordering is
supported; however, sequential address ordering is nibble-based.
Burst Length
CAS#
BT PD
A9 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3A8 A2 A1 A0
Mode Register (Mx)
Address Bus
97
65438210
A10A12 A11BA0
BA1
1011
12
n
0
0
14
Burst Length
Reserved
Reserved
4
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
M0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
M1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
M2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
Burst Type
Sequential
Interleaved
M3
CAS Latency (CL)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
3
4
5
6
7
M4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
M5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
M6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
Mode
Normal
Test
M7
15
DLL TM
0
1
DLL Reset
No
Yes
M8
Write Recovery
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
M9
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
M10
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
M11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
WR
An2
MR
M14
0
1
0
1
Mode Register Definition
Mode register (MR)
Extended mode register (EMR)
Extended mode register (EMR2)
Extended mode register (EMR3)
M15
0
0
1
1
M12
0
1
PD Mode
Fast exit
(normal)
Slow exit
(low power)
Latency
16
BA21
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 78 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Operating Mode
The normal operating mode is selected by issuing a command with bit M7 set to0,” and
all other bits set to the desired values, as shown in Figure 38 on page 77. When bit M7 is
“1,” no other bits of the mode register are programmed. Programming bit M7 to “1”
places the DDR2 SDRAM into a test mode that is only used by the manufacturer and
should not be used. No operation or functionality is guaranteed if M7 bit is “1.
DLL RESET
DLL RESET is defined by bit M8, as shown in Figure 38 on page 77. Programming bit M8
to “1” will activate the DLL RESET function. Bit M8 is self-clearing, meaning it returns
back to a value of “0” after the DLL RESET function has been issued.
Anytime the DLL RESET function is used, 200 clock cycles must occur before a READ
command can be issued to allow time for the internal clock to be synchronized with the
external clock. Failing to wait for synchronization to occur may result in a violation of
the tAC or tDQSCK parameters.
Write Recovery
Write recovery (WR) time is defined by bits M9–M11, as shown in Figure 38 on page 77.
The WR register is used by the DDR2 SDRAM during WRITE with auto precharge opera-
tion. During WRITE with auto precharge operation, the DDR2 SDRAM delays the
internal auto precharge operation by WR clocks (programmed in bits M9–M11) from the
last data burst. An example of WRITE with auto precharge is shown in Figure 66 on
page 105.
WR values of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 clocks may be used for programming bits M9–M11. The
user is required to program the value of WR, which is calculated by dividing tWR (in
nanoseconds) by tCK (in nanoseconds) and rounding up a noninteger value to the next
integer; WR (cycles) = tWR (ns)/tCK (ns). Reserved states should not be used as an
unknown operation or incompatibility with future versions may result.
Table 42: Burst Definition
Burst Length
Starting Column
Address
(A2, A1, A0)
Order of Accesses Within a Burst
Burst Type = Sequential Burst Type = Interleaved
4 0 0 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3
0 1 1, 2, 3, 0 1, 0, 3, 2
1 0 2, 3, 0, 1 2, 3, 0, 1
1 1 3, 0, 1, 2 3, 2, 1, 0
8 0 0 0 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0 0 1 1, 2, 3, 0, 5, 6, 7, 4 1, 0, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6
0 1 0 2, 3, 0, 1, 6, 7, 4, 5 2, 3, 0, 1, 6, 7, 4, 5
0 1 1 3, 0, 1, 2, 7, 4, 5, 6 3, 2, 1, 0, 7, 6, 5, 4
1 0 0 4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3 4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3
1 0 1 5, 6, 7, 4, 1, 2, 3, 0 5, 4, 7, 6, 1, 0, 3, 2
1 1 0 6, 7, 4, 5, 2, 3, 0, 1 6, 7, 4, 5, 2, 3, 0, 1
1 1 1 7, 4, 5, 6, 3, 0, 1, 2 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 79 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Power-Down Mode
Active power-down (PD) mode is defined by bit M12, as shown in Figure 38 on page 77.
PD mode allows the user to determine the active power-down mode, which determines
performance versus power savings. PD mode bit M12 does not apply to precharge PD
mode.
When bit M12 = 0, standard active PD mode, or “fast-exit” active PD mode, is enabled.
The tXARD parameter is used for fast-exit active PD exit timing. The DLL is expected to
be enabled and running during this mode.
When bit M12 = 1, a lower-power active PD mode, or “slow-exit” active PD mode, is
enabled. The tXARDS parameter is used for slow-exit active PD exit timing. The DLL can
be enabled but “frozen” during active PD mode because the exit-to-READ command
timing is relaxed. The power difference expected between IDD3P normal and IDD3P low-
power mode is defined in Table 11 on page 27.
CAS Latency (CL)
The CAS latency (CL) is defined by bits M4–M6, as shown in Figure 38 on page 77. CL is
the delay, in clock cycles, between the registration of a READ command and the avail-
ability of the first bit of output data. The CL can be set to 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 clocks, depending
on the speed grade option being used.
DDR2 SDRAM does not support any half-clock latencies. Reserved states should not be
used as an unknown operation otherwise incompatibility with future versions may
result.
DDR2 SDRAM also supports a feature called posted CAS additive latency (AL). This
feature allows the READ command to be issued prior to tRCD (MIN) by delaying the
internal command to the DDR2 SDRAM by AL clocks. The AL feature is described in
further detail in “Posted CAS Additive Latency (AL)” on page 83.
Examples of CL = 3 and CL = 4 are shown in Figure 39 on page 80; both assume AL = 0. If
a READ command is registered at clock edge n, and the CL is m clocks, the data will be
available nominally coincident with clock edge n + m (this assumes AL = 0).
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 80 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 39: CAS Latency (CL)
Notes: 1. BL = 4.
2. Posted CAS# additive latency (AL) = 0.
3. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
Extended Mode Register (EMR)
The extended mode register controls functions beyond those controlled by the mode
register; these additional functions are DLL enable/disable, output drive strength, on-
die termination (ODT), posted AL, off-chip driver impedance calibration (OCD), DQS#
enable/disable, RDQS/RDQS# enable/disable, and output disable/enable. These func-
tions are controlled via the bits shown in Figure 40 on page 81. The EMR is programmed
via the LM command and will retain the stored information until it is programmed again
or the device loses power. Reprogramming the EMR will not alter the contents of the
memory array, provided it is performed correctly.
The EMR must be loaded when all banks are idle and no bursts are in progress, and the
controller must wait the specified time tMRD before initiating any subsequent opera-
tion. Violating either of these requirements could result in an unspecified operation.
DO
n + 3
DO
n + 2
DO
n + 1
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
CL = 3 (AL = 0)
READ
T0 T1 T2
Don’t careTransitioning data
NOP NOP NOP
DO
n
T3 T4 T5
NOP NOP
T6
NOP
DO
n + 3
DO
n + 2
DO
n + 1
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
CL = 4 (AL = 0)
READ
T0 T1 T2
NOP NOP NOP
DO
n
T3 T4 T5
NOP NOP
T6
NOP
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 81 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 40: Extended Mode Register Definition
Notes: 1. E16 (BA2) is only applicable for densities >1Gb, reserved for future use, and must be pro-
grammed to “0.”
2. Mode bits (En) with corresponding address balls (An) greater than E12 (A12) are reserved
for future use and must be programmed to “0.”
3. Not all listed AL options are supported in any individual speed grade.
4. As detailed on page 74, during initialization of the ODC operation, all three bits must be set
to “1” for the OCD default state, then set to “0” before initialization is finished.
DLL Enable/Disable
The DLL may be enabled or disabled by programming bit E0 during the LM command,
as shown in Figure 40. The DLL must be enabled for normal operation. DLL enable is
required during power-up initialization and upon returning to normal operation after
having disabled the DLL for the purpose of debugging or evaluation. Enabling the DLL
should always be followed by resetting the DLL using the LM command.
The DLL is automatically disabled when entering SELF REFRESH operation and is auto-
matically reenabled and reset upon exit of SELF REFRESH operation.
Anytime the DLL is enabled (and subsequently reset), 200 clock cycles must occur before
a READ command can be issued to allow time for the internal clock to synchronize with
the external clock. Failing to wait for synchronization to occur may result in a violation
of the tAC or tDQSCK parameters.
DLL Posted CAS# RTTOut
A9 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3A8 A2 A1 A0
Extended mode
register (Ex)
Address bus
9765438210
A10A12 A11BA0BA1
101112n
0
14
E1
0
1
Output Drive Strength
Full
Reduced
Posted CAS# Additive Latency (AL)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Reserved
E3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
E4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
E5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
DLL Enable
Enable (normal)
Disable (test/debug)
E0
15
E11
0
1
RDQS Enable
No
Yes
OCD Program
An2
ODS
RTT
DQS#
E10
0
1
DQS# Enable
Enable
Disable
RDQS
RTT (Nominal)
RTT disabled
75Ω
150Ω
50Ω
E2
0
1
0
1
E6
0
0
1
1
0
1
Outputs
Enabled
Disabled
E12
0
1
0
1
Mode Register Set
Mode register (MR)
Extended mode register (EMR)
Extended mode register (EMR2)
Extended mode register (EMR3)
E15
0
0
1
1
E14
MRS
BA21
16
0
OCD Operation
OCD exit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Enable OCD defaults
E7
0
1
0
0
1
E8
0
0
1
0
1
E9
0
0
0
1
1
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 82 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Anytime the DLL is disabled and the device is operated below 25 MHz, any AUTO
REFRESH command should be followed by a PRECHARGE ALL command.
Output Drive Strength
The output drive strength is defined by bit E1, as shown in Figure 40 on page 81. The
normal drive strength for all outputs is specified to be SSTL_18. Programming bit E1 = 0
selects normal (full strength) drive strength for all outputs. Selecting a reduced drive
strength option (E1 = 1) will reduce all outputs to approximately 45 to 60 percent of the
SSTL_18 drive strength. This option is intended for the support of lighter load and/or
point-to-point environments.
DQS# Enable/Disable
The DQS# ball is enabled by bit E10. When E10 = 0, DQS# is the complement of the
differential data strobe pair DQS/DQS#. When disabled (E10 = 1), DQS is used in a
single-ended mode and the DQS# ball is disabled. When disabled, DQS# should be left
floating. This function is also used to enable/disable RDQS#. If RDQS is enabled
(E11 = 1) and DQS# is enabled (E10 = 0), then both DQS# and RDQS# will be enabled.
RDQS Enable/Disable
The RDQS ball is enabled by bit E11, as shown in Figure 40 on page 81. This feature is
only applicable to the x8 configuration. When enabled (E11 = 1), RDQS is identical in
function and timing to data strobe DQS during a READ. During a WRITE operation,
RDQS is ignored by the DDR2 SDRAM.
Output Enable/Disable
The OUTPUT ENABLE function is defined by bit E12, as shown in Figure 40 on page 81.
When enabled (E12 = 0), all outputs (DQ, DQS, DQS#, RDQS, RDQS#) function normally.
When disabled (E12 = 1), all outputs (DQ, DQS, DQS#, RDQS, RDQS#) are disabled, thus
removing output buffer current. The output disable feature is intended to be used
during IDD characterization of read current.
On-Die Termination (ODT)
ODT effective resistance, RTT (EFF), is defined by bits E2 and E6 of the EMR, as shown in
Figure 40 on page 81. The ODT feature is designed to improve signal integrity of the
memory channel by allowing the DDR2 SDRAM controller to independently turn on/off
ODT for any or all devices. RTT effective resistance values of 50Ω, 75Ω, and 150Ω are
selectable and apply to each DQ, DQS/DQS#, RDQS/RDQS#, UDQS/UDQS#, LDQS/
LDQS#, DM, and UDM/LDM signals. Bits (E6, E2) determine what ODT resistance is
enabled by turning on/off “sw1,” “sw2,” or “sw3.” The ODT effective resistance value is
selected by enabling switch “sw1,” which enables all R1 values that are 150Ω each,
enabling an effective resistance of 75Ω (RTT2 [EFF] = R2/2). Similarly, if “sw2” is enabled,
all R2 values that are 300Ω each, enable an effective ODT resistance of 150Ω
(RTT2[EFF]= R2/2). Switch sw3” enables R1 values of 100Ω, enabling effective resis-
tance of 50Ω. Reserved states should not be used, as an unknown operation or incom-
patibility with future versions may result.
The ODT control ball is used to determine when RTT (EFF) is turned on and off,
assuming ODT has been enabled via bits E2 and E6 of the EMR. The ODT feature and
ODT input ball are only used during active, active power-down (both fast-exit and slow-
exit modes), and precharge power-down modes of operation.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 83 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
ODT must be turned off prior to entering self refresh mode. During power-up and initial-
ization of the DDR2 SDRAM, ODT should be disabled until the EMR command is issued.
This will enable the ODT feature, at which point the ODT ball will determine the RTT
(EFF) value. Anytime the EMR enables the ODT function, ODT may not be driven HIGH
until eight clocks after the EMR has been enabled (see Figure 82 on page 121 for ODT
timing diagrams).
Off-Chip Driver (OCD) Impedance Calibration
The OFF-CHIP DRIVER function is an optional DDR2 JEDEC feature not supported by
Micron and thereby must be set to the default state. Enabling OCD beyond the default
settings will alter the I/O drive characteristics and the timing and output I/O specifica-
tions will no longer be valid (see "Initialization" on page 73 for proper setting of OCD
defaults).
Posted CAS Additive Latency (AL)
Posted CAS additive latency (AL) is supported to make the command and data bus effi-
cient for sustainable bandwidths in DDR2 SDRAM. Bits E3–E5 define the value of AL, as
shown in Figure 40 on page 81. Bits E3–E5 allow the user to program the DDR2 SDRAM
with an AL of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 clocks. Reserved states should not be used as an
unknown operation or incompatibility with future versions may result.
In this operation, the DDR2 SDRAM allows a READ or WRITE command to be issued
prior to tRCD (MIN) with the requirement that AL tRCD (MIN). A typical application
using this feature would set AL = tRCD (MIN) - 1 × tCK. The READ or WRITE command is
held for the time of the AL before it is issued internally to the DDR2 SDRAM device. RL is
controlled by the sum of AL and CL; RL = AL + CL. Write latency (WL) is equal to RL
minus one clock; WL = AL + CL - 1 × tCK. An example of RL is shown in Figure 41 on
page 83. An example of a WL is shown in Figure 42 on page 84.
Figure 41: READ Latency
Notes: 1. BL = 4.
2. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
3. RL = AL + CL = 5.
DO
n + 3
DO
n + 2
DO
n + 1
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
AL = 2
ACTIVE n
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
READ nNOP NOP
DO
n
T3 T4 T5
NOP
T6
NOP
T7 T8
NOP NOP
CL = 3
RL = 5
tRCD (MIN)
NOP
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 84 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 42: WRITE Latency
Notes: 1. BL = 4.
2. CL = 3.
3. WL = AL + CL - 1 = 4.
Extended Mode Register 2 (EMR2)
The extended mode register 2 (EMR2) controls functions beyond those controlled by the
mode register. Currently all bits in EMR2 are reserved, except for E7, which is used in
commercial or high-temperature operations, as shown in Figure 43. The EMR2 is
programmed via the LM command and will retain the stored information until it is
programmed again or until the device loses power. Reprogramming the EMR will not
alter the contents of the memory array, provided it is performed correctly.
Bit E7 (A7) must be programmed as “1” to provide a faster refresh rate on IT and AT
devices if TC exceeds 85°C.
EMR2 must be loaded when all banks are idle and no bursts are in progress, and the
controller must wait the specified time tMRD before initiating any subsequent opera-
tion. Violating either of these requirements could result in an unspecified operation.
Figure 43: Extended Mode Register 2 (EMR2) Definition
Notes: 1. E16 (BA2) is only applicable for densities >1Gb, reserved for future use, and must be pro-
grammed to “0.”
2. Mode bits (En) with corresponding address balls (An) greater than E12 (A12) are reserved
for future use and must be programmed to “0.”
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
ACTIVE n
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
NOP NOP
T3 T4 T5
NOP
T6
NOP
DI
n + 3
DI
n + 2
DI
n + 1
WL = AL + CL - 1 = 4
T7
NOP
DI
n
tRCD (MIN)
NOP
AL = 2 CL - 1 = 2
WRITE n
A9 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3A8 A2 A1 A0
Extended mode
register (Ex)
Address bus
9765438210
A10A12 A11BA0BA1
101112n
0
14
15
An2
E14
0
1
0
1
Mode Register Set
Mode register (MR)
Extended mode register (EMR)
Extended mode register (EMR2)
Extended mode register (EMR3)
E15
0
0
1
1
MRS 00 000
SRT0 000 0 0 0
BA21
16
0
E7
0
1
SRT Enable
1X refresh rate (0°C to 85°C)
2X refresh rate (>85°C)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 85 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Extended Mode Register 3 (EMR 3)
The extended mode register 3 (EMR3) controls functions beyond those controlled by the
mode register. Currently all bits in EMR3 are reserved, as shown in Figure 44 on page 85.
The EMR3 is programmed via the LM command and will retain the stored information
until it is programmed again or until the device loses power. Reprogramming the EMR
will not alter the contents of the memory array, provided it is performed correctly.
EMR3 must be loaded when all banks are idle and no bursts are in progress, and the
controller must wait the specified time tMRD before initiating any subsequent opera-
tion. Violating either of these requirements could result in an unspecified operation.
Figure 44: Extended Mode Register 3 (EMR3) Definition
Notes: 1. E16 (BA2) is only applicable for densities >1Gb, is reserved for future use, and must be pro-
grammed to “0.”
2. Mode bits (En) with corresponding address balls (An) greater than E12 (A12) are reserved
for future use and must be programmed to “0.”
ACTIVATE
Before any READ or WRITE commands can be issued to a bank within the DDR2
SDRAM, a row in that bank must be opened (activated), even when additive latency is
used. This is accomplished via the ACTIVATE command, which selects both the bank
and the row to be activated.
After a row is opened with an ACTIVATE command, a READ or WRITE command may be
issued to that row subject to the tRCD specification. tRCD (MIN) should be divided by
the clock period and rounded up to the next whole number to determine the earliest
clock edge after the ACTIVATE command on which a READ or WRITE command can be
entered. The same procedure is used to convert other specification limits from time
units to clock cycles. For example, a tRCD (MIN) specification of 20ns with a 266 MHz
clock (tCK = 3.75ns) results in 5.3 clocks, rounded up to 6. This is shown in Figure 45 on
page 86, which covers any case where 5 < tRCD (MIN)/tCK 6. Figure 45 also shows the
case for tRRD where 2 < tRRD (MIN)/tCK 3.
E14
0
1
0
1
Mode Register Set
Mode register (MR)
Extended mode register (EMR)
Extended mode register (EMR2)
Extended mode register (EMR3)
E15
0
0
1
1
A9 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3A8 A2 A1 A0
Extended mode
register (Ex)
Address bus
A10A12 A11BA0BA1 An2
MRS 0 0 0000 000 0 0 0
BA21
00 0
9765438210101112n141516
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 86 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 45: Example: Meeting tRRD (MIN) and tRCD (MIN)
A subsequent ACTIVATE command to a different row in the same bank can only be
issued after the previous active row has been closed (precharged). The minimum time
interval between successive ACTIVATE commands to the same bank is defined by tRC.
A subsequent ACTIVATE command to another bank can be issued while the first bank is
being accessed, which results in a reduction of total row-access overhead. The minimum
time interval between successive ACTIVATE commands to different banks is defined by
tRRD.
DDR2 devices with 8-banks (1Gb or larger) have an additional requirement: tFAW. This
requires no more than four ACTIVATE commands may be issued in any given tFAW
(MIN) period, as shown in Figure 46.
Figure 46: Multi-Bank Activate Restriction
Notes: 1. DDR2-533 (-37E, x4 or x8), tCK = 3.75ns, BL = 4, AL = 3, CL = 4, tRRD (MIN) = 7.5ns,
tFAW (MIN) = 37.5ns.
Command
Dont Care
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6T7
tRRD tRRD
Row Row Col
Bank xBank y
Row
Bank zBank y
NOPACT NOP NOPACT NOP NOP RD/WR
tRCD
CK#
Address
Bank address
CK
T8 T9
NOP NOP
Command
Don’t Care
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
tRRD (MIN)
Row Row
READACT ACT NOP
Bank address
CK#
Address
CK
T8 T9
Col
Bank a
ACTREAD READ READACT NOP
Row
Col Row
Col Col
Bank c
Bank bBank d
Bank cBank e
ACT
Row
T10
Bank d
Bank bBank a
tFAW (MIN)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 87 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
READ
READ bursts are initiated with a READ command. The starting column and bank
addresses are provided with the READ command, and auto precharge is either enabled
or disabled for that burst access. If auto precharge is enabled, the row being accessed is
automatically precharged at the completion of the burst. If auto precharge is disabled,
the row will be left open after the completion of the burst.
During READ bursts, the valid data-out element from the starting column address will
be available READ latency (RL) clocks later. RL is defined as the sum of AL and CL:
RL = AL + CL. The value for AL and CL are programmable via the MR and EMR
commands, respectively. Each subsequent data-out element will be valid nominally at
the next positive or negative clock edge (at the next crossing of CK and CK#). Figure 47
on page 88 shows examples of RL based on different AL and CL settings.
DQS/DQS# is driven by the DDR2 SDRAM along with output data. The initial LOW state
on DQS and the HIGH state on DQS# are known as the read preamble (tRPRE). The LOW
state on DQS and the HIGH state on DQS# coincident with the last data-out element are
known as the read postamble (tRPST).
Upon completion of a burst, assuming no other commands have been initiated, the DQ
will go High-Z. A detailed explanation of tDQSQ (valid data-out skew), tQH (data-out
window hold), and the valid data window are depicted in Figure 56 on page 95 and
Figure 57 on page 96. A detailed explanation of tDQSCK (DQS transition skew to CK) and
tAC (data-out transition skew to CK) is shown in Figure 58 on page 97.
Data from any READ burst may be concatenated with data from a subsequent READ
command to provide a continuous flow of data. The first data element from the new
burst follows the last element of a completed burst. The new READ command should be
issued x cycles after the first READ command, where x equals BL/2 cycles (see Figure 48
on page 89).
Nonconsecutive read data is illustrated in Figure 49 on page 90. Full-speed random read
accesses within a page (or pages) can be performed. DDR2 SDRAM supports the use of
concurrent auto precharge timing (see Table 43 on page 93).
DDR2 SDRAM does not allow interrupting or truncating of any READ burst using BL = 4
operations. Once the BL = 4 READ command is registered, it must be allowed to
complete the entire READ burst. However, a READ (with auto precharge disabled) using
BL = 8 operation may be interrupted and truncated only by another READ burst as long
as the interruption occurs on a 4-bit boundary due to the 4n prefetch architecture of
DDR2 SDRAM. As shown in Figure 50 on page 90, READ burst BL = 8 operations may not
be interrupted or truncated with any other command except another READ command.
Data from any READ burst must be completed before a subsequent WRITE burst is
allowed. An example of a READ burst followed by a WRITE burst is shown in Figure 51 on
page 91. The tDQSS (NOM) case is shown (tDQSS [MIN] and tDQSS [MAX] are defined in
Figure 59 on page 99.)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 88 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 47: READ Latency
Notes: 1. DO n = data-out from column n.
2. BL = 4.
3. Three subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO n.
4. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP
Bank a,
Col n
CK
CK#
Command
Address
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DO
n
DO
n
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4n T5nT4 T5
CK
CK#
Command READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP
Address Bank a,
Col n
RL = 3 (AL = 0, CL = 3)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DO
n
T0 T1 T2 T3 T3n T4nT4 T5
CK
CK#
Command READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP
Address Bank a,
Col n
RL = 4 (AL = 0, CL = 4)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
T0 T1 T2 T3 T3n T4nT4 T5
AL = 1 CL = 3
RL = 4 (AL = 1 + CL = 3)
Don’t Care
Transitioning Data
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 89 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 48: Consecutive READ Bursts
Notes: 1. DO n (or b) = data-out from column n (or column b).
2. BL = 4.
3. Three subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO n.
4. Three subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO b.
5. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
6. Example applies only when READ commands are issued to same device.
CK
CK#
Command READ NOP READ NOP NOP NOP NOP
Address
Bank,
Col nBank,
Col b
Command READ NOP READ NOP NOP NOP
Address
Bank,
Col nBank,
Col b
RL = 3
CK
CK#
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RL = 4
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DO
nDO
b
DO
nDO
b
T0 T1 T2 T3 T3n T4nT4 T5 T6
T5n T6n
T0 T1 T2 T3T2n
NOP
T3n T4nT4 T5 T6
T5n T6n
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
tCCD
tCCD
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 90 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 49: Nonconsecutive READ Bursts
Notes: 1. DO n (or b) = data-out from column n (or column b).
2. BL = 4.
3. Three subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO n.
4. Three subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO b.
5. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
6. Example applies when READ commands are issued to different devices or nonconsecutive
READs.
Figure 50: READ Interrupted by READ
Notes: 1. BL = 8 required; auto precharge must be disabled (A10 = LOW).
2. NOP or COMMAND INHIBIT commands are valid. PRECHARGE command cannot be issued to
banks used for READs at T0 and T2.
3. Interrupting READ command must be issued exactly 2 × tCK from previous READ.
4. READ command can be issued to any valid bank and row address (READ command at T0 and
T2 can be either same bank or different bank).
5. Auto precharge can be either enabled (A10 = HIGH) or disabled (A10 = LOW) by the inter-
rupting READ command.
6. Example shown uses AL = 0; CL = 3, BL = 8, shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
Command READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOPREAD
T0 T1 T2 T3 T3n T4 T5 T7 T8T6T4n T6n T7n
CK
CK#
T5 T7 T8T5n T6T4n T7n
Command NOP NOP NOP NOPREAD NOP NOP NOPREAD
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4
DQ DO
nDO
b
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
Address Bank,
Col nBank,
Col b
Address Bank,
Col nBank,
Col b
CK
CK#
CL = 4
CL = 3
DQ DO
nDO
b
DQS, DQS#
DQS, DQS#
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
T3 T4 T5 T6
Command READ
1
NOP
2
NOP
2
Valid Valid Valid
READ
3
Valid Valid Valid
T7 T8 T9
CK
CK#
CL = 3 (AL = 0)
tCCD
Address Valid
4
Valid
4
CL = 3 (AL = 0)
DQ DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO
A10
DQS, DQS#
Valid
5
DO
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 91 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 51: READ-to-WRITE
Notes: 1. BL = 4; CL = 3; AL = 2.
2. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
READ with Precharge
A READ burst may be followed by a PRECHARGE command to the same bank, provided
auto precharge is not activated. The minimum READ-to-PRECHARGE command
spacing to the same bank has two requirements that must be satisfied: AL + BL/2 clocks
and tRTP. tRTP is the minimum time from the rising clock edge that initiates the last 4-bit
prefetch of a READ command to the PRECHARGE command. For BL = 4, this is the time
from the actual READ (AL after the READ command) to PRECHARGE command. For
BL = 8, this is the time from AL + 2 × CK after the READ-to-PRECHARGE command.
Following the PRECHARGE command, a subsequent command to the same bank
cannot be issued until tRP is met. However, part of the row precharge time is hidden
during the access of the last data elements.
Examples of READ-to-PRECHARGE for BL = 4 are shown in Figure 52 and in Figure 53 on
page 92 for BL = 8. The delay from READ-to-PRECHARGE period to the same bank is
AL + BL/2 - 2CK + MAX (tRTP/tCK or 2 × CK) where MAX means the larger of the two.
Figure 52: READ-to-PRECHARGE – BL = 4
Notes: 1. RL = 4 (AL = 1, CL = 3); BL = 4.
2. tRTP 2 clocks.
3. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
CK
CK# T0 T1 T2
Dont CareTransitioning Data
T3 T4 T5 T6T7 T8 T9 T10 T11
AL = 2 CL = 3
RL = 5
Command
ACT nNOP
NOP NOP
NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP
READ n
WRITE
DQS, DQS#
DQ DO
nDO
n + 1 DO
n + 2 DO
n + 3 DI
nDI
n + 1 DI
n + 2 DI
n + 3
tRCD = 3 WL = RL - 1 = 4
NOP
CK
CK#
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
Address Bank aBank aBank a
tRAS (MIN)
tRTP (MIN)
AL + BL/2 - 2CK + MAX (tRTP/tCK or 2CK)
Command READ NOP
PRE
ACTNOP NOP NOP NOP
4-bit
prefetch
DQ DO DO DO DO
A10 Valid Valid
CL = 3AL = 1
DQS, DQS#
tRC (MIN)
tRP (MIN)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 92 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 53: READ-to-PRECHARGE – BL = 8
Notes: 1. RL = 4 (AL = 1, CL = 3); BL = 8.
2. tRTP 2 clocks.
3. Shown with nominal tAC, tDQSCK, and tDQSQ.
READ with Auto Precharge
If A10 is HIGH when a READ command is issued, the READ with auto precharge function
is engaged. The DDR2 SDRAM starts an auto precharge operation on the rising clock
edge that is AL + (BL/2) cycles later than the READ with auto precharge command
provided tRAS (MIN) and tRTP are satisfied. If tRAS (MIN) is not satisfied at this rising
clock edge, the start point of the auto precharge operation will be delayed until tRAS
(MIN) is satisfied. If tRTP (MIN) is not satisfied at this rising clock edge, the start point of
the auto precharge operation will be delayed until tRTP (MIN) is satisfied. When the
internal precharge is pushed out by tRTP, tRP starts at the point where the internal
precharge happens (not at the next rising clock edge after this event).
When BL = 4, the minimum time from READ with auto precharge to the next ACTIVATE
command is AL + (tRTP + tRP)/tCK. When BL = 8, the minimum time from READ with
auto precharge to the next ACTIVATE command is AL + 2 clocks + (tRTP + tRP)/tCK. The
term (tRTP + tRP)/tCK is always rounded up to the next integer. A general purpose equa-
tion can also be used: AL + BL/2 - 2CK + (tRTP + tRP)/tCK. In any event, the internal
precharge does not start earlier than two clocks after the last 4-bit prefetch.
READ with auto precharge command may be applied to one bank while another bank is
operational. This is referred to as concurrent auto precharge operation, as noted in
Table 43 on page 93. Examples of READ with precharge and READ with auto precharge
with applicable timing requirements are shown in Figure 54 on page 93 and Figure 55 on
page 94, respectively.
CK
CK# T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
CL = 3AL = 1
DQS, DQS#
First 4-bit
prefetch
Second 4-bit
prefetch
Address
Bank aBank aBank a
tRAS (MIN)
Valid Valid
AL + BL/2 - 2CK + MAX (tRTP/tCK or 2CK)
DQ
DO DO DO DO DO DO DO
Command
READ NOP NOP NOPNOP NOPNOP ACTPRE
A10
tRP (MIN)
tRTP (MIN)
tRC (MIN)
DO
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 93 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 54: Bank Read – Without Auto Precharge
Notes: 1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these
times.
2. BL = 4 and AL = 0 in the case shown.
3. The PRECHARGE command can only be applied at T6 if tRAS (MIN) is met.
4. READ-to-PRECHARGE = AL + BL/2 -2CK + MAX (tRTP/tCK or 2CK).
5. Disable auto precharge.
6. “Don’t Care” if A10 is HIGH at T5.
7. I/O balls, when entering or exiting High-Z, are not referenced to a specific voltage level, but
to when the device begins to drive or no longer drives, respectively.
8. DO n = data-out from column n; subsequent elements are applied in the programmed
order.
Table 43: READ Using Concurrent Auto Precharge
From
Command
(Bank n)
To Command
(Bank m)
Minimum Delay
(with Concurrent Auto Precharge) Units
READ with
auto
precharge
READ or READ with auto precharge BL/2 tCK
WRITE or WRITE with auto precharge (BL/2) + 2 tCK
PRECHARGE or ACTIVATE 1 tCK
CK
CK#
CKE
A10
Bank address
tCK tCH tCL
RA
tRCD
tRAS3
CL = 3
DM
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T7n T8nT6 T7 T8
DQ8
DQS, DQS#
Case 1: tAC (MIN)
and tDQSCK (MIN)
Case 2: tAC (MAX)
and tDQSCK (MAX)
DQ8
DQS, DQS#
t
RPRE
t
DQSCK (MIN)
t
LZ (MIN)
t
LZ (MAX)
t
AC (MIN)
t
LZ (MIN)
DO
n
t
HZ (MAX)
t
AC (MAX)
t
LZ (MIN)
DO
n
NOP1
NOP1
Command ACT
RA Col n
PRE
3
Bank x
RA
RA
Bank xBank x6
7
7
77
ACT
Bank x
NOP1NOP1NOP1NOP1
t
HZ (MIN)
One bank
All banks
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
READ2
Address
5
tRTP4
tRPST
t
DQSCK (MAX)
T9
tRP
tRC
tRPRE
tRPST
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 94 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 55: Bank Read – with Auto Precharge
Notes: 1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these
times.
2. BL = 4, RL = 4 (AL = 1, CL = 3) in the case shown.
3. The DDR2 SDRAM internally delays auto precharge until both tRAS (MIN) and tRTP (MIN)
have been satisfied.
4. Enable auto precharge.
5. I/O balls, when entering or exiting HIGH-Z, are not referenced to a specific voltage level,
but to when the device begins to drive or no longer drives, respectively.
6. DO n = data-out from column n; subsequent elements are applied in the programmed
order.
4-bit
prefetch
CK
CK#
CKE
A10
Bank address
tCK tCH tCL
RA
tRCD
tRAS
tRC
tRP
CL = 3
DM
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T7n T8nT6 T7 T8
DQ6
DQS, DQS#
Case 1: tAC (MIN)
and tDQSCK (MIN)
Case 2: tAC (MAX)
and tDQSCK (MAX)
DQ6
DQS, DQS#
t
RPRE
tRPRE
tRPST
tRPST
t
DQSCK (MIN)
t
DQSCK (MAX)
t
LZ (MIN)
t
LZ (MAX)
t
AC (MIN)
t
LZ (MIN)
t
HZ (MAX)
t
AC (MAX)
t
LZ (MAX)
DO
n
NOP1
NOP1
Command1
ACT
RA Col n
Bank x
RA
RA
Bank x
ACT
Bank x
NOP1NOP1NOP1NOP1NOP1
t
HZ (MIN)
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
READ2,3
Address
AL = 1
tRTP
Internal
precharge
4
5
5
55
DO
n
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 95 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 56: x4, x8 Data Output Timing – tDQSQ, tQH, and Data Valid Window
Notes: 1. tHP is the lesser of tCL or tCH clock transitions collectively when a bank is active.
2. tDQSQ is derived at each DQS clock edge, is not cumulative over time, begins with DQS
transitions, and ends with the last valid transition of DQ.
3. DQ transitioning after the DQS transition defines the tDQSQ window. DQS transitions at T2
and at T2n are “early DQS,” at T3 are “nominal DQS,” and at T3n are “late DQS.”
4. DQ0, DQ1, DQ2, DQ3 for x4 or DQ0–DQ7 for x8.
5. tQH is derived from tHP: tQH = tHP - tQHS.
6. The data valid window is derived for each DQS transition and is defined as tQH - tDQSQ.
DQ (last data valid)
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQS, DQS#3
DQ (last data valid)
DQ (first data no longer valid)
DQ (first data no longer valid)
All DQs and DQS collectively6
Earliest signal transition
Latest signal transition
T2
T2
T2
T2n
T2n
T2n
T3
T3
T3
T3n
T3n
T3n
CK
CK#
T1 T2 T3 T4T2n T3n
tQH5
tHP1tHP1t
HP1
tQH5
tQHS
tQH5
tHP1tHP1tHP1
tQH5
tDQSQ2t
DQSQ2t
DQSQ2t
DQSQ2
Data
valid
window
Data
valid
window
Data
valid
window
Data
valid
window
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 96 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 57: x16 Data Output Timing – tDQSQ, tQH, and Data Valid Window
Notes: 1. tHP is the lesser of tCL or tCH clock transitions collectively when a bank is active.
2. tDQSQ is derived at each DQS clock edge, is not cumulative over time, begins with DQS
transitions, and ends with the last valid transition of DQ.
3. DQ transitioning after the DQS transitions define the tDQSQ window. LDQS defines the
lower byte, and UDQS defines the upper byte.
4. DQ0, DQ1, DQ2, DQ3, DQ4, DQ5, DQ6, or DQ7.
5. tQH is derived from tHP: tQH = tHP - tQHS.
6. The data valid window is derived for each DQS transition and is tQH - tDQSQ.
7. DQ8, DQ9, DQ10, D11, DQ12, DQ13, DQ14, or DQ15.
DQ (last data valid)4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
DQ4
LDQS, LDSQ#3
DQ (last data valid)4
DQ (first data no longer valid)4
DQ (first data no longer valid)4
DQ0–DQ7 and LDQS collectively6T2
T2
T2
T2n
T2n
T2n
T3
T3
T3
T3n
T3n
T3n
CK
CK# T1 T2 T3 T4T2n T3n
tQH
5
tQH
5
tDQSQ
2
tDQSQ
2
tDQSQ
2
tDQSQ
2
Data valid
window
Data valid
window
DQ (last data valid)7
DQ7
DQ7
DQ7
DQ7
DQ7
DQ7
UDQS, UDQS#3
DQ (last data valid)7
DQ (first data no longer valid)7
DQ (first data no longer valid)7
DQ8–DQ15 and UDQS collectively6T2
T2
T2
T2n
T2n
T2n
T3
T3
T3
T3n
T3n
T3n
tQH
5
tQH
5
tQH
5
tQH
5
tDQSQ
2
tDQSQ
2
tDQSQ
2
tHP
1
tHP
1
tHP
1
tHP
1
tHP
1
tHP
1
tQH
5
Data valid
window
Data valid
window
Data valid
window
Data valid
window
Data valid
window
Upper byte
Lower byte
Data valid
window
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
tQHS
tQH
5
tDQSQ
2
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 97 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 58: Data Output Timing – tAC and tDQSCK
Notes: 1. READ command with CL = 3, AL = 0 issued at T0.
2. tDQSCK is the DQS output window relative to CK and is the long-term component of DQS
skew.
3. DQ transitioning after DQS transitions define tDQSQ window.
4. All DQ must transition by tDQSQ after DQS transitions, regardless of tAC.
5. tAC is the DQ output window relative to CK and is the “long term” component of DQ skew.
6. tLZ (MIN) and tAC (MIN) are the first valid signal transitions.
7. tHZ (MAX) and tAC (MAX) are the latest valid signal transitions.
8. I/O balls, when entering or exiting High-Z, are not referenced to a specific voltage level, but
to when the device begins to drive or no longer drives, respectively.
WRITE
WRITE bursts are initiated with a WRITE command. DDR2 SDRAM uses WL equal to RL
minus one clock cycle (WL = RL - 1CK) (see "READ" on page 71). The starting column
and bank addresses are provided with the WRITE command, and auto precharge is
either enabled or disabled for that access. If auto precharge is enabled, the row being
accessed is precharged at the completion of the burst.
Note: For the WRITE commands used in the following illustrations, auto precharge is dis-
abled.
During WRITE bursts, the first valid data-in element will be registered on the first rising
edge of DQS following the WRITE command, and subsequent data elements will be
registered on successive edges of DQS. The LOW state on DQS between the WRITE
command and the first rising edge is known as the write preamble; the LOW state on
DQS following the last data-in element is known as the write postamble.
The time between the WRITE command and the first rising DQS edge is WL ±tDQSS.
Subsequent DQS positive rising edges are timed, relative to the associated clock edge, as
±tDQSS. tDQSS is specified with a relatively wide range (25 percent of one clock cycle).
All of the WRITE diagrams show the nominal case, and where the two extreme cases
(tDQSS [MIN] and tDQSS [MAX]) might not be intuitive, they have also been included.
Figure 59 on page 99 shows the nominal case and the extremes of tDQSS for BL = 4. Upon
completion of a burst, assuming no other commands have been initiated, the DQ will
remain High-Z and any additional input data will be ignored.
CK
CK#
DQS, DQS# or
LDQS, LDQS#/UDQ, UDQS#3
T01T1 T2 T3 T3n T4 T4n T5 T5n T6 T6n T7
tRPST
tDQSCK2 (MIN) tDQSCK2 (MAX)
DQ (last data valid)
DQ (first data valid)
All DQs collectively4
tAC5 (MIN) tAC5 (MAX)
tLZ (MIN) tHZ (MAX)
T3n
T3n T4n T5n T6n
T5
T3 T4 T5 T6
tHZ (MAX)
tLZ (MIN) tRPRE
T3 T4 T4n T5 T5n T6 T6n
T6n
T6
T5nT4nT4T3nT3
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 98 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Data for any WRITE burst may be concatenated with a subsequent WRITE command to
provide continuous flow of input data. The first data element from the new burst is
applied after the last element of a completed burst. The new WRITE command should
be issued x cycles after the first WRITE command, where x equals BL/2.
Figure 60 on page 100 provides examples of concatenated bursts of BL = 4 and how full-
speed random write accesses within a page or pages can be performed. An example of
nonconsecutive WRITEs is shown in Figure 61 on page 100. DDR2 SDRAM supports
concurrent auto precharge options, as shown in Table 44 on page 98.
DDR2 SDRAM does not allow interrupting or truncating any WRITE burst using BL = 4
operation. Once the BL = 4 WRITE command is registered, it must be allowed to
complete the entire WRITE burst cycle. However, a WRITE BL = 8 operation (with auto
precharge disabled) might be interrupted and truncated only by another WRITE burst as
long as the interruption occurs on a 4-bit boundary due to the 4n-prefetch architecture
of DDR2 SDRAM. WRITE burst BL = 8 operations may not be interrupted or truncated
with any command except another WRITE command, as shown in Figure 62 on
page 101.
Data for any WRITE burst may be followed by a subsequent READ command. To follow a
WRITE, tWTR should be met, as shown in Figure 63 on page 102. The number of clock
cycles required to meet tWTR is either 2 or tWTR/tCK, whichever is greater. Data for any
WRITE burst may be followed by a subsequent PRECHARGE command. tWR must be
met, as shown in Figure 64 on page 103. tWR starts at the end of the data burst, regard-
less of the data mask condition.
Table 44: WRITE Using Concurrent Auto Precharge
From Command
(Bank n)
To Co m m an d
(Bank m)
Minimum Delay
(with Concurrent Auto Precharge) Units
WRITE with auto
precharge
READ or READ with auto precharge (CL - 1) + (BL/2) + tWTR tCK
WRITE or WRITE with auto
precharge
(BL/2) tCK
PRECHARGE or ACTIVATE 1 tCK
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 99 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 59: WRITE Burst
Notes: 1. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
2. DI b = data-in for column b.
3. Three subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DI b.
4. Shown with BL = 4, AL = 0, CL = 3; thus, WL = 2.
5. A10 is LOW with the WRITE command (auto precharge is disabled).
DQS, DQS#
tDQSS (MAX)
tDQSS (NOM)
tDQSS (MIN)
DM
DQ
CK
CK#
Command
WRITE NOP NOP
Address
Bank a,
Col b
NOP NOP
T0 T1 T2 T3T2n T4T3n
DQS, DQS#
5
DM
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DM
DQ
DI
b
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
tDQSS5
WL ± tDQSS
WL - tDQSS tDQSS5
WL + tDQSS
DI
b
DI
b
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 100 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 60: Consecutive WRITE-to-WRITE
Notes: 1. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
2. DI b, etc. = data-in for column b, etc.
3. Three subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DI b.
4. Three subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DI n.
5. Shown with BL = 4, AL = 0, CL = 3; thus, WL = 2.
6. Each WRITE command may be to any bank.
Figure 61: Nonconsecutive WRITE-to-WRITE
Notes: 1. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
2. DI b (or n), etc. = data-in for column b (or column n).
3. Three subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DI b.
4. Three subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DI n.
5. Shown with BL = 4, AL = 0, CL = 3; thus, WL = 2.
6. Each WRITE command may be to any bank.
CK
CK#
Command
WRITE NOP WRITE NOP NOP NOP
Address
Bank,
Col b
NOP
Bank,
Col n
T0 T1 T2 T3 T2n T4 T5 T4n T6 T5n T3n T1n
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DM
DI
n
DI
b
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
WL ± tDQSS
tDQSS (NOM)
WL = 2
tCCD
WL = 2
11
1
CK
CK#
Command
WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP
Address
Bank,
Col b
WRITE
Bank,
Col n
T0 T1 T2 T3T2n T4 T5T4nT3n T5n T6 T6n
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DM
DI
b
tDQSS (NOM) WL ± tDQSS
Don’t Care
Transitioning Data
WL = 2 WL = 2
111
DI
n
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 101 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 62: WRITE Interrupted by WRITE
Notes: 1. BL = 8 required and auto precharge must be disabled (A10 = LOW).
2. The NOP or COMMAND INHIBIT commands are valid. The PRECHARGE command cannot be
issued to banks used for WRITEs at T0 and T2.
3. The interrupting WRITE command must be issued exactly 2 × tCK from previous WRITE.
4. The earliest WRITE-to-PRECHARGE timing for WRITE at T0 is WL + BL/2 + tWR where tWR
starts with T7 and not T5 (because BL = 8 from MR and not the truncated length).
5. The WRITE command can be issued to any valid bank and row address (WRITE command at
T0 and T2 can be either same bank or different bank).
6. Auto precharge can be either enabled (A10 = HIGH) or disabled (A10 = LOW) by the inter-
rupting WRITE command.
7. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
8. Example shown uses AL = 0; CL = 4, BL = 8.
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
WL = 3
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9
WL = 32-clock requirement
Address
A10
Valid4Valid4
Valid
4
NOP2
NOP2
NOP2
NOP2
NOP2
7 7777
DI
a + 1 DI
a + 3
DI
a + 2 DI
b + 1 DI
b + 2 DI
b + 3 DI
b + 4 DI
b + 5 DI
b + 6 DI
b + 7
DI
b
DI
a
Valid6
Valid5Valid5
WRITE1 aWRITE3 b
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 102 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 63: WRITE-to-READ
Notes: 1. tWTR is required for any READ following a WRITE to the same device, but it is not required
between module ranks.
2. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
3. DI b = data-in for column b; DO n = data-out from column n.
4. BL = 4, AL = 0, CL = 3; thus, WL = 2.
5. One subsequent element of data-in is applied in the programmed order following DI b.
6. tWTR is referenced from the first positive CK edge after the last data-in pair.
7. A10 is LOW with the WRITE command (auto precharge is disabled).
8. The number of clock cycles required to meet tWTR is either 2 or tWTR/tCK, whichever is
greater.
tDQSS (NOM)
CK
CK#
Command
WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP
Address
Bank a,
Col bBank a,
Col n
READ
T0 T1 T2 T3T2n T4 T5 T9nT3n T6 T7 T8 T9
tWTR1
CL = 3
CL = 3
CL = 3
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DM
tDQSS (MIN)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DM
tDQSS (MAX)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
DM
DI
b
DI
DI
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
WL ± tDQSS
WL - tDQSS
WL + tDQSS
NOP
DI
2
2
2
DI
b
DI
b
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 103 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 64: WRITE-to-PRECHARGE
Notes: 1. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
2. DI b = data-in for column b.
3. Three subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DI b.
4. BL = 4, CL = 3, AL = 0; thus, WL = 2.
5. tWR is referenced from the first positive CK edge after the last data-in pair.
6. The PRECHARGE and WRITE commands are to the same bank. However, the PRECHARGE
and WRITE commands may be to different banks, in which case tWR is not required and the
PRECHARGE command could be applied earlier.
7. A10 is LOW with the WRITE command (auto precharge is disabled).
tDQSS (NOM)
CK
CK#
Command
WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOPNOP
Address
Bank a,
Col bBank,
(a or all)
NOP
T0 T1 T2 T3T2n T4 T5T3n T6 T7
tWR tRP
DQ
DQS#, DQS
DM
tDQSS (MIN)
DQ
DQS#, DQS
DM
tDQSS (MAX)
DQ
DQS#, DQS
DM
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
WL + tDQSS
WL - tDQSS
WL + tDQSS
DI
b
PRE
1
1
1
DI
b
DI
b
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 104 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 65: Bank Write – Without Auto Precharge
Notes: 1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these
times.
2. BL = 4 and AL = 0 in the case shown.
3. Disable auto precharge.
4. “Don’t Care” if A10 is HIGH at T9.
5. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
6. DI n = data-in for column n; subsequent elements are applied in the programmed order.
7. tDSH is applicable during tDQSS (MIN) and is referenced from CK T5 or T6.
8. tDSS is applicable during tDQSS (MAX) and is referenced from CK T6 or T7.
CK
CK#
CKE
A10
tCK tCH tCL
RA
tRCD
tRAS tRP
tWR
T0 T1 T2 T3 T5 T6 T6n T7 T8 T9T5n
NOP1
NOP1
Command
3
5
ACT
RA Col n
WRITE2NOP1
One bank
All banks
Bank x
PRE
Bank x
NOP1NOP1NOP1
tDQSL tDQSH tWPST
Bank x4
DQ6
DM
DI
n
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
WL ± tDQSS (NOM)
tWPRE
DQS, DQS#
Address
NOP1
WL = 2
T4
Bank address
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 105 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 66: Bank Write – with Auto Precharge
Notes: 1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these
times.
2. BL = 4 and AL = 0 in the case shown.
3. Enable auto precharge.
4. WR is programmed via MR9–MR11 and is calculated by dividing tWR (in ns) by tCK and
rounding up to the next integer value.
5. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
6. DI n = data-in from column n; subsequent elements are applied in the programmed order.
7. tDSH is applicable during tDQSS (MIN) and is referenced from CK T5 or T6.
8. tDSS is applicable during tDQSS (MAX) and is referenced from CK T6 or T7.
CK
CK#
CKE
A10
Bank address
tCK tCH tCL
RA
tRCD
tRP
WR
4
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T5n T6 T7 T8 T6n
NOP1
NOP1
Command
3
ACT
RA Col n
WRITE2NOP1
Bank x
NOP1
Bank x
NOP1NOP1NOP1
tDQSL tDQSH tWPST
DQ6
DM
WL ±tDQSS (NOM)
Don’t Care
Transitioning Data
tWPRE
DQS, DQS#
Address
T9
NOP1
WL = 2
DI
n
5
tRAS
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 106 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 67: WRITE – DM Operation
Notes: 1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these
times.
2. BL = 4, AL = 1, and WL = 2 in the case shown.
3. Disable auto precharge.
4. “Don’t Care” if A10 is HIGH at T11.
5. tWR starts at the end of the data burst regardless of the data mask condition.
6. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
7. DI n = data-in for column n; subsequent elements are applied in the programmed order.
8. tDSH is applicable during tDQSS (MIN) and is referenced from CK T6 or T7.
9. tDSS is applicable during tDQSS (MAX) and is referenced from CK T7 or T8.
CK
CK#
CKE
A10
Bank address
t
CK
t
CH
t
CL
RA
t
RCD
t
RAS tRPA
tWR5
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T7n T6 T7 T8 T6n
NOP1
NOP1
Command
3
ACT
RA Col n
WRITE2
NOP1
One bank
All banks
Bank x Bank x
NOP1NOP1NOP1NOP1NOP1NOP1
tDQSL tDQSH
tWPST
Bank x4
DQ7
DM
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
WL ±
t
DQSS (NOM)
tWPRE
PRE
DQS, DQS#
Address
T9 T10 T11
WL = 2
DI
n
6
AL = 1
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 107 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 68: Data Input Timing
Notes: 1. tDSH (MIN) generally occurs during tDQSS (MIN).
2. tDSS (MIN) generally occurs during tDQSS (MAX).
3. Subsequent rising DQS signals must align to the clock within tDQSS.
4. WRITE command issued at T0.
5. For x16, LDQS controls the lower byte and UDQS controls the upper byte.
6. WRITE command with WL = 2 (CL = 3, AL = 0) issued at T0.
PRECHARGE
PRECHARGE can be initiated by either a manual PRECHARGE command or by an auto
precharge in conjunction with either a READ or WRITE command. PRECHARGE will
deactivate the open row in a particular bank or the open row in all banks. The
PRECHARGE operation is shown in the previous READ and WRITE operation sections.
During a manual PRECHARGE command, the A10 input determines whether one or all
banks are to be precharged. In the case where only one bank is to be precharged, bank
address inputs determine the bank to be precharged. When all banks are to be
precharged, the bank address inputs are treated as “Dont Care.
Once a bank has been precharged, it is in the idle state and must be activated prior to
any READ or WRITE commands being issued to that bank. When a single-bank
PRECHARGE command is issued, tRP timing applies. When the PRECHARGE (ALL)
command is issued, tRPA timing applies, regardless of the number of banks opened.
DQS, DQS#
tDQSH tWPST
tDQSL
tDSS2t
DSH1
tDSH1t
DSS2
DM
DQ
CK
CK#
T1T0 T1n T2 T2n T3 T4T3n
DI
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
tWPRE
3
WL - tDQSS (NOM)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 108 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
REFRESH
The commercial temperature DDR2 SDRAM requires REFRESH cycles at an average
interval of 7.8125µs (MAX) and all rows in all banks must be refreshed at least once every
64ms. The refresh period begins when the REFRESH command is registered and ends
tRFC (MIN) later. The average interval must be reduced to 3.9µs (MAX) when TC exceeds
+85°C.
Figure 69: Refresh Mode
Notes: 1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other valid commands may be possible at
these times. CKE must be active during clock positive transitions.
2. The second REFRESH is not required and is only shown as an example of two back-to-back
REFRESH commands.
3. “Don’t Care” if A10 is HIGH at this point; A10 must be HIGH if more than one bank is active
(must precharge all active banks).
4. DM, DQ, and DQS signals are all “Don’t Care”/High-Z for operations shown.
CK
CK#
Command
NOP1
NOP1NOP1
PRE
CKE
RA
Address
A10
Bank address
Bank(s)3BA
REF NOP1REF2NOP1ACT
NOP1
One bank
All banks
tCK tCH tCL
RA
DQ4
DM4
DQS, DQS#4
tRFC2
tRP tRFC (MIN)
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 Ta0 Tb0
Ta1 Tb1 Tb2
Don’t Care
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 109 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
SELF REFRESH
The SELF REFRESH command is initiated with CKE is LOW. The differential clock should
remain stable and meet tCKE specifications at least 1 × tCK after entering self refresh
mode. The procedure for exiting self refresh requires a sequence of commands. First, the
differential clock must be stable and meet tCK specifications at least 1 × tCK prior to CKE
going back to HIGH. Once CKE is HIGH (tCKE [MIN] has been satisfied with three clock
registrations), the DDR2 SDRAM must have NOP or DESELECT commands issued for
tXSNR. A simple algorithm for meeting both refresh and DLL requirements is to apply
NOP or DESELECT commands for 200 clock cycles before applying any other command.
Figure 70: Self Refresh
Notes: 1. Clock must be stable and meeting tCK specifications at least 1 × tCK after entering self
refresh mode and at least 1 × tCK prior to exiting self refresh mode.
2. Self refresh exit is asynchronous; however, tXSNR and tXSRD timing starts at the first rising
clock edge where CKE HIGH satisfies tISXR.
3. CKE must stay HIGH until tXSRD is met; however, if self refresh is being reentered, CKE may
go back LOW after tXSNR is satisfied.
4. NOP or DESELECT commands are required prior to exiting self refresh until state Tc0, which
allows any nonREAD command.
5. tXSNR is required before any nonREAD command can be applied.
6. ODT must be disabled and RTT off (tAOFD and tAOFPD have been satisfied) prior to entering
self refresh at state T1.
7. tXSRD (200 cycles of CK) is required before a READ command can be applied at state Td0.
8. Device must be in the all banks idle state prior to entering self refresh mode.
9. After self refresh has been entered, tCKE (MIN) must be satisfied prior to exiting self
refresh.
10. Upon exiting SELF REFRESH, ODT must remain LOW until tXSRD is satisfied.
CK1
CK#
Command
NOP REF
Address
CKE1
Valid
DQ
DM
DQS#, DQS
NOP4
tRP
8
tCHtCLtCK
1
tCK
1
tXSNR
2, 5, 10
tISXR
2
Enter self refresh
mode (synchronous)
Exit self refresh
mode (asynchronous)
T0 T1 Ta2Ta1
Dont Care
Ta0 Tc0Tb0
tXSRD2,
7
Valid5
NOP4
tCKE (MIN)
9
T2
ODT6
tAOFD/tAOFPD
6
Td0
Valid7
Valid5
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
tIH
tIH
tCKE3
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 110 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Power-Down Mode
DDR2 SDRAMs support multiple power-down modes that allow significant power
savings over normal operating modes. CKE is used to enter and exit different power-
down modes. Power-down entry and exit timings are shown in Figure 71 on page 111.
Detailed power-down entry conditions are shown in Figures 72–79. The CKE Truth Table,
Table 45, is shown on page 112.
DDR2 SDRAMs require CKE to be registered HIGH (active) at all times that an access is
in progress—from the issuing of a READ or WRITE command until completion of the
burst. Thus, a clock suspend is not supported. For READs, a burst completion is defined
when the read postamble is satisfied; for WRITEs, a burst completion is defined when
the write postamble and tWR (WRITE-to-PRECHARGE command) or tWTR (WRITE-to-
READ command) are satisfied, as shown in Figures 74 and 75 on page 114. The number
of clock cycles required to meet tWTR is either two or tWTR/tCK, whichever is greater.
Power-down mode (see Figure 71 on page 111) is entered when CKE is registered LOW
coincident with a NOP or DESELECT command. CKE is not allowed to go LOW during a
mode register or extended mode register command time, or while a READ or WRITE
operation is in progress. If power-down occurs when all banks are idle, this mode is
referred to as precharge power-down. If power-down occurs when there is a row active in
any bank, this mode is referred to as active power-down. Entering power-down deacti-
vates the input and output buffers, excluding CK, CK#, ODT, and CKE. For maximum
power savings, the DLL is frozen during precharge power-down. Exiting active power-
down requires the device to be at the same voltage and frequency as when it entered
power-down. Exiting precharge power-down requires the device to be at the same
voltage as when it entered power-down; however, the clock frequency is allowed to
change (see "Precharge Power-Down Clock Frequency Change" on page 116).
The maximum duration for either active or precharge power-down is limited by the
refresh requirements of the device tRFC (MAX). The minimum duration for power-down
entry and exit is limited by the tCKE (MIN) parameter. The following must be main-
tained while in power-down mode: CKE LOW, a stable clock signal, and stable power
supply signals at the inputs of the DDR2 SDRAM. All other input signals are “Dont Care
except ODT. Detailed ODT timing diagrams for different power-down modes are shown
in Figure 82 on page 121–Figure 89 on page 125.
The power-down state is synchronously exited when CKE is registered HIGH (in
conjunction with a NOP or DESELECT command), as shown in Figure 71 on page 111.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 111 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 71: Power-Down
Notes: 1. If this command is a PRECHARGE (or if the device is already in the idle state), then the
power-down mode shown is precharge power-down. If this command is an ACTIVATE (or if
at least one row is already active), then the power-down mode shown is active power-
down.
2. tCKE (MIN) of three clocks means CKE must be registered on three consecutive positive clock
edges. CKE must remain at the valid input level the entire time it takes to achieve the three
clocks of registration. Thus, after any CKE transition, CKE may not transition from its valid
level during the time period of tIS + 2 × tCK + tIH. CKE must not transition during its tIS and
tIH window.
3. tXP timing is used for exit precharge power-down and active power-down to any nonREAD
command.
4. tXARD timing is used for exit active power-down to READ command if fast exit is selected
via MR (bit 12 = 0).
5. tXARDS timing is used for exit active power-down to READ command if slow exit is selected
via MR (bit 12 = 1).
6. No column accesses are allowed to be in progress at the time power-down is entered. If the
DLL was not in a locked state when CKE went LOW, the DLL must be reset after exiting
power-down mode for proper READ operation.
CK
CK#
Command
NOP NOP NOP
Address
CKE
DQ
DM
DQS, DQS#
Valid
tCH tCL
Enter
power-down
mode6
Exit
power-down
mode Don’t Care
tCKE (MIN)2
tCKE (MIN)
2
Valid
Valid1
Valid
tXP3, tXARD4
tXARDS5
Valid Valid
tIS
tIH
tIH
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
tCK
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 112 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Notes: 1. CKE (n) is the logic state of CKE at clock edge n; CKE (n - 1) was the state of CKE at the pre-
vious clock edge.
2. Current state is the state of the DDR2 SDRAM immediately prior to clock edge n.
3. Command (n) is the command registered at clock edge n, and action (n) is a result of com-
mand (n).
4. The state of ODT does not affect the states described in this table. The ODT function is not
available during self refresh (see "ODT Timing" on page 120 for more details and specific
restrictions).
5. Power-down modes do not perform any REFRESH operations. The duration of power-down
mode is therefore limited by the refresh requirements.
6. “X” means “Don’t Care” (including floating around VREF) in self refresh and power-down.
However, ODT must be driven HIGH or LOW in power-down if the ODT function is enabled
via EMR.
7. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved unless explicitly described else-
where in this document.
8. Valid commands for power-down entry and exit are NOP and DESELECT only.
9. On self refresh exit, DESELECT or NOP commands must be issued on every clock edge occur-
ring during the tXSNR period. READ commands may be issued only after tXSRD (200 clocks)
is satisfied.
10. Valid commands for self refresh exit are NOP and DESELECT only.
11. Power-down and self refresh can not be entered while READ or WRITE operations, LOAD
MODE operations, or PRECHARGE operations are in progress. See “SELF REFRESH” on
page 109 and “SELF REFRESH” on page 72 for a list of detailed restrictions.
12. Minimum CKE HIGH time is tCKE = 3 × tCK. Minimum CKE LOW time is tCKE = 3 × tCK. This
requires a minimum of 3 clock cycles of registration.
13. Self refresh mode can only be entered from the all banks idle state.
14. Must be a legal command, as defined in Table 38 on page 66.
Table 45: Truth Table – CKE
Notes 1–4 apply to the entire table
Current State
CKE
Command (n) CS#,
RAS#, CAS#, WE# Action (n)Notes
Previous
Cycle
(n - 1)
Current
Cycle (n)
Power-down L L X Maintain power-down 5, 6
L H DESELECT or NOP Power-down exit 7, 8
Self refresh L L X Maintain self refresh 6
L H DESELECT or NOP Self refresh exit 7, 9, 10
Bank(s) active H L DESELECT or NOP Active power-down entry 7, 8, 11, 12
All banks idle H L DESELECT or NOP Precharge power-down entry 7, 8, 11
H L REFRESH Self refresh entry 10, 12, 13
H H Shown in Table 38 on page 66 14
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 113 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 72: READ-to-Power-Down or Self Refresh Entry
Notes: 1. In the example shown, READ burst completes at T5; earliest power-down or self refresh
entry is at T6.
2. Power-down or self refresh entry may occur after the READ burst completes.
Figure 73: READ with Auto Precharge-to-Power-Down or Self Refresh Entry
Notes: 1. In the example shown, READ burst completes at T5; earliest power-down or self refresh
entry is at T6.
2. Power-down or self refresh entry may occur after the READ burst completes.
DO
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RL = 3
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
NOP NOP
T3 T4 T5
Valid
T6 T7
tCKE (MIN)
Address
A10
NOP
CKE
READ
Valid
Power-down
2
or
self refresh entry
NOP1
Valid
DODO DO
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RL = 3
T0 T1 T2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
NOP NOP
T3 T4 T5
Valid Valid
T6 T7
tCKE (MIN)
Address
A10
NOP
CKE
READ
Valid
Power-down or
self refresh
2
entry
NOP1
DO DODO DO
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 114 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 74: WRITE-to-Power-Down or Self-Refresh Entry
Notes: 1. Power-down or self refresh entry may occur after the WRITE burst completes.
Figure 75: WRITE with Auto Precharge-to-Power-Down or Self Refresh Entry
Notes: 1. Internal PRECHARGE occurs at Ta0 when WR has completed; power-down entry may occur
1xtCK later at Ta1, prior to tRP being satisfied.
2. WR is programmed through MR9–MR11 and represents (tWR [MIN]ns/tCK) rounded up to
next integer tCK.
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
WL = 3
T
0
T1 T
2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
NOP NOP
DO
T
3
T4 T5
Valid Valid
T
6
Valid
T7 T
8
tCKE (MIN)
Address
A10
NOP
WRITE
Valid
Power-down or
self refresh entry1
tWTR
NOP
1
DO DO DO
CKE
CK
CK#
Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
WL = 3
T
0
T1 T
2
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
NOP NOP
DO
T
3
T4 T5
Valid Valid
Ta
0
Valid1NOP
Ta1 Ta
2
tCKE (MIN)
Address
A10
NOP
CKE
WRITE
Valid
Power-down or
self refresh entry
WR2
DO DO DO
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 115 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 76: REFRESH Command-to-Power-Down Entry
Notes: 1. The earliest precharge power-down entry may occur is at T2, which is 1 × tCK after the
REFRESH command. Precharge power-down entry occurs prior to tRFC (MIN) being satisfied.
Figure 77: ACTIVATE Command-to-Power-Down Entry
Notes: 1. The earliest active power-down entry may occur is at T2, which is 1 × tCK after the ACTIVATE
command. Active power-down entry occurs prior to tRCD (MIN) being satisfied.
CK
CK#
Command
Don’t Care
T0 T1
Valid
REFRESH
T2 T3
tCKE (MIN)
CKE
Power-down1
entry
1 x tCK
NOP
CK
CK#
Command
Don’t Care
T0 T1
Valid ACT
T2
NOP
T3
tCKE (MIN)
CKE
Power-down1
entry
1 tCK
Address
Valid
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 116 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 78: PRECHARGE Command-to-Power-Down Entry
Notes: 1. The earliest precharge power-down entry may occur is at T2, which is 1 × tCK after the PRE-
CHARGE command. Precharge power-down entry occurs prior to tRP (MIN) being satisfied.
Figure 79: LOAD MODE Command-to-Power-Down Entry
Notes: 1. Valid address for LM command includes MR, EMR, EMR(2), and EMR(3) registers.
2. All banks must be in the precharged state and tRP met prior to issuing LM command.
3. The earliest precharge power-down entry is at T3, which is after tMRD is satisfied.
Precharge Power-Down Clock Frequency Change
When the DDR2 SDRAM is in precharge power-down mode, ODT must be turned off
and CKE must be at a logic LOW level. A minimum of two differential clock cycles must
pass after CKE goes LOW before clock frequency may change. The device input clock
frequency is allowed to change only within minimum and maximum operating frequen-
cies specified for the particular speed grade. During input clock frequency change, ODT
and CKE must be held at stable LOW levels. When the input clock frequency is changed,
CK
CK#
Command
Don’t Care
T0 T1
Valid
PRE
T2
NOP
T3
t
CKE (MIN)
CKE
Power-down1
entry
1 x
t
CK
Address
A10
Valid
All banks
vs.
Single bank
CK
CK#
Command
Don’t Care
T0 T1
Valid LM
T2
NOP
T3 T4
tCKE (MIN)
CKE
Power-down
3
entry
tMRD
Address
Valid1
tRP
2
NOP
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 117 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
new stable clocks must be provided to the device before precharge power-down may be
exited, and DLL must be reset via MR after precharge power-down exit. Depending on
the new clock frequency, additional LM commands might be required to adjust the CL,
WR, AL, and so forth. settings to account for the frequency change. Depending on the
new clock frequency, an additional LM command might be required to appropriately set
the WR MR9, MR10, MR11. During the DLL relock period of 200 cycles, ODT must
remain off. After the DLL lock time, the DRAM is ready to operate with a new clock
frequency.
Figure 80: Input Clock Frequency Change During Precharge Power-Down Mode
Notes: 1. A minimum of 2 × tCK is required after entering precharge power-down prior to changing
clock frequencies.
2. When the new clock frequency has changed and is stable, a minimum of 1 × tCK is required
prior to exiting precharge power-down.
3. Minimum CKE HIGH time is tCKE = 3 × tCK. Minimum CKE LOW time is tCKE = 3 × tCK. This
requires a minimum of three clock cycles of registration.
4. If this command is a PRECHARGE (or if the device is already in the idle state), then the
power-down mode shown is precharge power-down, which is required prior to the clock
frequency change.
CK
CK#
Command
Valid4NOP
Address
CKE
DQ
DM
DQS, DQS#
NOP
tCK
Enter precharge
power-down mode
Exit precharge
power-down mode
T0 T1 T3 Ta0T2
Don’t Care
Valid
tCKE (MIN)
3
tXP
LM
DLL RESET
Valid
Valid
NOP
tCH tCL
Ta1 Ta2 Tb0Ta3
2 x tCK (MIN)
1
1 x tCK (MIN)
2
tCH tCL
tCK
ODT
200 x tCK
NOP
Ta4
Previous clock frequency New clock frequency
Frequency
change
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
High-Z
High-Z
tCKE (MIN)
3
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 118 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
RESET
CKE LOW Anytime
DDR2 SDRAM applications may go into a reset state anytime during normal operation.
If an application enters a reset condition, CKE is used to ensure the DDR2 SDRAM
device resumes normal operation after reinitializing. All data will be lost during a reset
condition; however, the DDR2 SDRAM device will continue to operate properly if the
following conditions outlined in this section are satisfied.
The reset condition defined here assumes all supply voltages (VDD, VDDQ, VDDL, and
VREF ) are stable and meet all DC specifications prior to, during, and after the RESET
operation. All other input balls of the DDR2 SDRAM device are a “Dont Care” during
RESET with the exception of CKE.
If CKE asynchronously drops LOW during any valid operation (including a READ or
WRITE burst), the memory controller must satisfy the timing parameter tDELAY before
turning off the clocks. Stable clocks must exist at the CK, CK# inputs of the DRAM before
CKE is raised HIGH, at which time the normal initialization sequence must occur (see
"Initialization" on page 73). The DDR2 SDRAM device is now ready for normal operation
after the initialization sequence. Figure 81 on page 119 shows the proper sequence for a
RESET operation.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 119 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 81: RESET Function
Notes: 1. VDD, VDDL, VDDQ, VTT, and VREF must be valid at all times.
2. Either NOP or DESELECT command may be applied.
3. DM represents DM for x4/x8 configuration and UDM, LDM for x16 configuration. DQS rep-
resents DQS, DQS#, UDQS, UDQS#, LDQS, LDQS#, RDQS, RDQS# for the appropriate configu-
ration (x4, x8, x16).
4. In certain cases where a READ cycle is interrupted, CKE going HIGH may result in the com-
pletion of the burst.
5. Initialization timing is shown in Figure 37 on page 74.
CKE
R
TT
Bank address
High-Z
DM3
DQS3
High-Z
Address
A10
CK
CK#
tCL
Command
NOP2PRE
All banks
Ta0
Don’t CareTransitioning Data
tRPA
tCL
tCK
ODT
DQ3
High-Z
T = 400ns (MIN)
Tb0
READ NOP2
T0 T1 T2
Col n
Bank a
tDELAY
1
DODO
READ NOP2
Col n
Bank b
High-Z
High-Z
Unknown R
TT
On
System
RESET
T3 T4 T5
Start of normal
5
initialization
sequence
NOP2
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
4
DO
tCKE (MIN)
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 120 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
ODT Timing
Once a 12ns delay (tMOD) has been satisfied, and after the ODT function has been
enabled via the EMR LOAD MODE command, ODT can be accessed under two timing
categories. ODT will operate either in synchronous mode or asynchronous mode,
depending on the state of CKE. ODT can switch anytime except during self refresh mode
and a few clocks after being enabled via EMR, as shown in Figure 82 on page 121.
There are two timing categories for ODT—turn-on and turn-off. During active mode
(CKE HIGH) and fast-exit power-down mode (any row of any bank open, CKE LOW,
MR[12 = 0]), tAOND, tAON, tAOFD, and tAOF timing parameters are applied, as shown in
Figure 84 on page 122.
During slow-exit power-down mode (any row of any bank open, CKE LOW, MR[12] = 1)
and precharge power-down mode (all banks/rows precharged and idle, CKE LOW),
tAONPD and tAOFPD timing parameters are applied, as shown in Figure 85 on page 122.
ODT turn-off timing, prior to entering any power-down mode, is determined by the
parameter tANPD (MIN), as shown in Figure 86 on page 123. At state T2, the ODT HIGH
signal satisfies tANPD (MIN) prior to entering power-down mode at T5. When tANPD
(MIN) is satisfied, tAOFD and tAOF timing parameters apply. Figure 86 on page 123 also
shows the example where tANPD (MIN) is not satisfied because ODT HIGH does not
occur until state T3. When tANPD (MIN) is not satisfied, tAOFPD timing parameters
apply.
ODT turn-on timing prior to entering any power-down mode is determined by the
parameter tANPD, as shown in Figure 87 on page 123. At state T2, the ODT HIGH signal
satisfies tANPD (MIN) prior to entering power-down mode at T5. When tANPD (MIN) is
satisfied, tAOND and tAON timing parameters apply. Figure 87 also shows the example
where tANPD (MIN) is not satisfied because ODT HIGH does not occur until state T3.
When tANPD (MIN) is not satisfied, tAONPD timing parameters apply.
ODT turn-off timing after exiting any power-down mode is determined by the parameter
tAXPD (MIN), as shown in Figure 88 on page 124. At state Ta1, the ODT LOW signal satis-
fies tAXPD (MIN) after exiting power-down mode at state T1. When tAXPD (MIN) is satis-
fied, tAOFD and tAOF timing parameters apply. Figure 88 also shows the example where
tAXPD (MIN) is not satisfied because ODT LOW occurs at state Ta0. When tAXPD (MIN)
is not satisfied, tAOFPD timing parameters apply.
ODT turn-on timing after exiting either slow-exit power-down mode or precharge
power-down mode is determined by the parameter tAXPD (MIN), as shown in Figure 89
on page 125. At state Ta1, the ODT HIGH signal satisfies tAXPD (MIN) after exiting
power-down mode at state T1. When tAXPD (MIN) is satisfied, tAOND and tAON timing
parameters apply. Figure 89 also shows the example where tAXPD (MIN) is not satisfied
because ODT HIGH occurs at state Ta0. When tAXPD (MIN) is not satisfied, tAONPD
timing parameters apply.
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 121 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 82: ODT Timing for Entering and Exiting Power-Down Mode
MRS Command to ODT Update Delay
During normal operation, the value of the effective termination resistance can be
changed with an EMRS set command. tMOD (MAX) updates the RTT setting.
Figure 83: Timing for MRS Command to ODT Update Delay
Notes: 1. The LM command is directed to the mode register, which updates the information in EMR
(A6, A2), that is, RTT (nominal).
2. To prevent any impedance glitch on the channel, the following conditions must be met:
tAOFD must be met before issuing the LM command; ODT must remain LOW for the entire
duration of the tMOD window until tMOD is met.
t
ANPD (3
t
CKs)
First CKE latched LOW
t
AXPD (8
t
CKs)
First CKE latched HIGH
Synchronous
Applicable modes
Applicable timing parameters
SynchronousSynchronous or
Asynchronous
Any mode except
self refresh mode
Any mode except
self refresh mode
Active power-down fast (synchronous)
Active power-down slow (asynchronous)
Precharge power-down (asynchronous)
t
AOND/
t
AOFD (synchronous)
t
AONPD/
t
AOFPD (asynchronous)
t
AOND/
t
AOFD
t
AOND/
t
AOFD
CKE
CK#
CK
ODT2
Internal
R
TT
setting
Command
Old settingUndefinedNew setting
0ns
2
tIS
tAOFD
Indicates A Break in
Time Scale
T0 Ta0 Ta1 Ta2 Ta3 Ta4 Ta5
EMRS1NOP NOPNOP NOP NOP
tMOD
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 122 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 84: ODT Timing for Active or Fast-Exit Power-Down Mode
Figure 85: ODT Timing for Slow-Exit or Precharge Power-Down Modes
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
Valid
ValidValidValid
ValidValidValid
CK#
CK
ODT
R
TT
tAOF (MAX)
tAON (MIN)
tAOND
Address
tAOFD
tAON (MAX) tAOF (MIN)
ValidValidValidValidValidValidValid
Command
tCHtCL
Dont CareR
TT
Unknown R
TT
On
tCK
CKE
Dont Care
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
ValidValidValidValidValidValidValid
CK#
CK
CKE
ODT
Address
ValidValidValidValidValidValidValid
Command
t
CH
tCL
tAONPD (MIN)
tAONPD (MAX)
tAOFPD (MIN)
tAOFPD (MAX)
Transitioning R
TT
T7
Valid
Valid
R
TT
Unknown R
TT
On
tCK
R
TT
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 123 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 86: ODT Turn-Off Timings When Entering Power-Down Mode
Figure 87: ODT Turn-On Timing When Entering Power-Down Mode
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
NOPNOP NOP NOPNOP NOP NOP
CK#
CK
Command
CKE
ODT
RTT
tAOF (MIN)
tAOF (MAX)
tAOFD
ODT
RTT
tAOFPD (MIN)
Don’t CareRTT Unknown RTT On
tAOFPD (MAX)
tANPD (MIN)
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
NOPNOP NOP NOPNOP NOP NOP
CK#
CK
RTT
tAON (MIN)
tAON (MAX)
ODT
RTT
tAONPD (MIN)
tAONPD (MAX)
Don’t CareTransitioning RTT RTT Unknown RTT On
ODT
tANPD (MIN)
Command
tAOND
CKE
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 124 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
Figure 88: ODT Turn-Off Timing When Exiting Power-Down Mode
Transitioning R
TT
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 Ta0 Ta1
NOPNOP NOP NOPNOP NOP NOP
CK#
CK
CKE
tAXPD (MIN)
ODT
R
TT
tAOF (MAX)
ODT
R
TT
tAOFPD (MIN)
tAOFPD (MAX)
Command
Ta2 Ta3 Ta4 Ta5
NOPNOP NOP NOP
Don’t CareR
TT
Unknown
tAOF (MIN)
Indicates A Break In
Time Scale R
TT
On
tCKE (MIN)
tAOFD
®
8000 S. Federal Way, P.O. Box 6, Boise, ID 83707-0006, Tel: 208-368-3900
prodmktg@micron.com www.micron.com Customer Comment Line: 800-932-4992
Micron, the M logo, and the Micron logo are trademarks of Micron Technology, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
This data sheet contains minimum and maximum limits specified over the power supply and temperature range set forth
herein. Although considered final, these specifications are subject to change, as further product development and data
characterization sometimes occur.
1Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR2 SDRAM
Operations
PDF: 09005aef8117c187/Source: 09005aef821aed36 Micron Technology, Inc., reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
DDR2_x4x8x16_Core2.fm - 1Gb DDR2: Rev. N; Core DDR2: Rev. C 4/08 EN 125 ©2003 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Figure 89: ODT Turn-On Timing When Exiting Power-Down Mode
T1T0 T2 T3 T4 Ta0 Ta1
NOPNOP NOP NOPNOP NOP NOP
CK#
CK
CKE
tAXPD (MIN)
Command
Ta2 Ta3 Ta4 Ta5
NOPNOP NOP NOP
tAON (MIN)
tAON (MAX)
R
TT
tAONPD (MIN)
tAONPD (MAX)
Don’t CareR
TT
Unknown R
TT
On
Indicates a break in
time scale
T
RANSITIONING
R
TT
tAOND
tCKE (MIN)
R
TT
ODT
ODT